PA 44 180 Seminole Information Manual 1979 1980

Piper Seminole
PA-44-180
1979 & 1980 Models
Note: At the time of issuance, this manual was an exact

duplicate of the FAA-Approved Pilot's Operating
Handbook, Airplane Flight Manual, or Owners Manual.
Use for training and familiarization purposes only. It will
not be kept current and cannot be used as a substitute
for the FAA-Approved POH / AFM / Owners Manual
required for operation of the airplane.
SEMINOLE
INFORMATION
MANUAL
Seminole
PA-44-180
HANDBOOK PART NO 761 662
Published by
PUBLICATIONS DEPARTMENT
Piper Aircraft Corporation
Issued: March 23. 1918
REPORT: VB8'O
i!
APPLICABILITY
Application of this handbook is limited to the specific Piper P A-44-180
model airplane designated by serial number and registration number on the
face of the title page of this handbook.
This handbook cannot be used for operational purposes unless kept in
a current status.
REVISIONS
The information compiled in the Pilot's Operating Handbook will be
kept current by revisions distributed to the airplane owners.
Revision material will consist of information necessary to update the
text of the present handbook and! or to add information to cover added
airplane equipment.
1.
Revisions
Revisions will be distributed whenever necessary as complete page

replacements or additions and shall be inserted into the handbook in
accordance with the instructions given below:
I.
2.
3.
Revision pages will replace only pages with the same page number.
Insert all additional pages in proper numerical order within each
section.
Page numbers followed by a small letter shall be inserted in direct
sequence with the same common numbered page.
II. Identification of Revised Material

Revised text and illustrations shall be indicated by a black vertical
line along the outside margin of the page, opposite revised, added or
deleted material. A line along the outside margin of the page opposite the
page number will indicate that an entire page wns added
REPORT: VB860
iii
Black lines will indicate only current revISIons with changes and
additions to or deletions of existing text and illustrations. Changes in
capitalization, spelling, punctuation or the physical location of material on
a page will not be identified.
OH1GINAL PAGES ISSUED
The original paJes issued for this handbook prior to revision are given
below:
Title, ii through vii, I-I through 1-21, 2-1 through 2-10, 3-1 through
3-21,4-1 through 4-27,5-1 through 5-33, 6-1 through 6-50, 7-1 through 7-34,
8-1 through 8-17, 9-\ through 9-22, and 10-\ through 10-3.
REPORT: VB-860
iv
PILOT'S OPERATING HANDBOOK LOG OF REVISIONS

Current Revisions to the PA-44-180 Seminole Pilot's Operating Handbook,
REPORT: V8-860 issued March 23, 1978.
Revision
Number and
Code
Rev. I
761 662
(PR781215)
Revised
Pages
1-3
1-4
1-5
1-8
1-18
2-3
2-4
2-6
3-i
3-2
3-3
3-4
3-5
3-6
3-7
3-8
3-9
3-10
3-11
3-12
Description of Revision
FAA Approval
Signature and
Date
Revised para. 1.5; relocated

info. to pg. 1-4.
Added info. from pg. 1-3;
relocated info. to pg. 1-5.
Added info. from pg. 1-4.
Revised para. 1.19.
Revised para. 1.21
Revised para. 2.7.
Revised para. 2.7.
Revised para. 2.23.
Revised para. 3.7.
Revised para. 3.3.
Revised para. 3.3; added
Warning from pg. 3-4.
Warning to pg. 3-3; added
info. from pg. 3-5.
Relocated info. to pg. 3-4;
added info. from pg. 3-6.
added info. from pg. 3-10
Relocated info. to pg. 3-9
Revised para. 3.7.
info. to pg. 3-13.
REPORT: VB-860
v
PILOT'S OPERATING HANDBOOK LOG OF REVISIONS (cont)
Revision
Number and
Code
Revised
Pages
Rev. I (cont) i
------
3-13
3-14
3-15
4-i
4-1
4-2
4-6
4-7
4-8
4-9
4-10
4-11
4-12
4-l1a
I
I 4-nb
4-13
REPORT: VB-860
vi
revised para. 3.7; added info.
from pg. 3-14.
revised para. 3.7; relocated
info. to pg. 3-15.
Added para. 4.16; revised
pg. nos.
info. to pg. 4-2.
revised para. 4.3.
Added info. to para. 4.5;
relocated info. to pg. 4-12a.
Added pg. (added info. from
pg.4-12).
Added pg. (added info. from
pg. 4-13).
Relocated info. to pg. 4-12b;
FAA Approval
Signature and
Date
Revision
Number and
Code
Revised
Pages
Rev. I (cont)
4-14
4-15
4-16
4-26
5-1
5-2
5-6
5-7
5-22
5-26
5-27
5-28
5-31
6-i
6-15
6-18
6-19
6-21
6-22
6-23
6-24
6-25
FAA Approval
Signature and
Date
Relocated info. to pg. 4-13,
added info. from pg. 4- j 5;
added para. 4.16.
Relocated info. to pg. 4-15.
Revised para. 4.51.
info. to pg. 5-2.
Revised para. 5.5.
Revised para. 5.5.
Revised Fig. 5-23.
Revised Fig. 5-31.
Revised Fig. 5-33.
Revised Fig. 5-35.
Revised Fig. 5-41.
Revised para. 6.11.
Revised para. 6.9.
Revised item 1 and removed
lines.
Removed lines.
Removed lines.
Revised item 53; removed
line".
lines.
lines.
lines.
REPORT: VB-860
vi-a
Revision
Number and
Code
Revised
Pages
_.._-_.- i
Rev. I (cont) i 6-26
6-21
6-31
6-33
6-34
6-35
6-31
6-38
6-39
6-45
6-46
6-47
6-48
7-i
7-10
1-14
1-35
8-10
REPORT: VB-860
vib
I Added
FAA Approval
Signature and
Date
...
para. 6. I I (g) from
I pg. 6-21; added new item 113.

Revised para. 6. I I (h) to 6. I I
(g) and relocated to pg. 6-26;
revised para. 6. I I (g) to 6. I I
(h); renumbered existing
items 113 and 115 to 121 and
123; added new items 115 and
111.
Revised item 165.
Revised hems 173 and 175.
Added item 176; relocated
item 187 to pg. 6-35.
Added item 187 from pg.
6-34.
Added new item 212; relocated item 219 to pg. 6-38.
6-37.
Revised item 231.
Revised item 281.
Added new item 282; relocated item 289 to pg. 6-47.
6-46.
Deleted item 353; revised
items 355 and 361.
Added para. 7.39.
Revised Fig. 1-7.
Revised para. 7.15.
Added pg. (added para. 7.39).
Revised para. 8.11.
WOI'cl
Ward Evans
Dec. 15. 1978
PILOT'S OPERATING HANDBOOK LOG OF REVISIONS (eont)
Revision
Number and
Code
Rev. 2
161 662
(PR190413)
6-46
Revised item 283; added item

284; relocated item 281 to pg
6-41.
6-46.
Revised para. 1.37 & 1.39 pg.
nos.
Revised para. 1.35.
para. 1.31 to pg. 1-36.
Added para. 1.35 info.; relocated para. 7.39 to pg. 7-36.
Added pg. (added para. 1.31
from pg. 1-34 & para. 1.39
from pg. 1-35).
6-41
1-i
7-33
1-34
1-35
1-36
Rev. 3
161 662
(PR190914)
FAA Approval
Signature and
Date
Revised
Pages
WOAcR. ~.
Ward Evans
April 13, 1919
Added Demo. X-Wind.

1-9
Revised para. 2.3.
2-2
2-1,2-8, Revised para. 2.21.
2-9,2-10
Added info.
3-6
Replaced abbreviations with
3-1
words.
Added word to title.
3-8
Revised procedure.
3-13
Revised para. 3.15.
3-18
Revised Caution.
4-6
4-11
Relocated info. to pg. 4-11.
4-12
Added Warning.
5-2
5-3, 5-5, Revised para. 5.5 (a), (c), Cd),
5-6, 5-1 (e), (f) and (g).
Revised List of Figures.
5-9
Revised Fig. 5-9.
5-15
REPORT: VB-860
vi-e

Revision
Number and
Code
Revised
Pages
Rev. 3 (cont)
i
5-24
thru
5-3!
6-1,6-2
6-3
6-4
6-5
6-18
6-24
6-26
6-27
6-30
6-31
6-32
6-34
6-35
6-36
6-37
6-38
6-39
REPORT: VB-860
vl-d
Revised Figs. 5-27 thru
5-41.
Revised para. 6.1.
Added Caution. Moved info.
to pg. 6-4.
Relocated info. from pg. 6-3.
Moved info. to pg. 6-5.
Revised items I, 3 and 5.
Revised item 77.
Revised. item 113.
Revised items 115 and 121.
Relocated item 159 from pg.
6-31.
Relocated item 159 to pg.
6-30; added item 167 from
pg.6-32.
Added item 170.
Added item 178.
Added item 206; revised item
207; relocated item 209.
Revised, relocated item 209
from pg.6-36; changed item
213 to 214; added new 213;
relocated items 215 and 217
to pg. 6-38.
Changed item 215 to 216,
relocated from pg. 6-37;
added new 216; relocated
item 217 from pg. 6-37;
relocated items 221 and 223
to pg. 6-39.
Relocated items 221 and 223
from pg. 6-38; added item
224; relocated items 225
thru 235 to pg. 6-40.
FAA Approval
Signature and
Date

Revision
Number and
Code
Revised
Pages
Rev.3(cont)
6-40
Relocated items 225 thru 235

from pg. 6-39; added items
230 and 234; relocated items
237 thru 243 to pg. 6-41.
from pg. 6-40; added item
242; relocated items 245 thru
251 to pg. 6-4la.
New page; relocated items
245 thru 25 I from pg. 6-41.
New page.
Revised item 291.
Revised item 355.
Revised para. 7.9.
Revised Figure 7-9.
Revised para. 7.23.
Revised Figure 7-25.
Revised para. 10.3 (h).
6-41
6-41a
6-41b
6-47
6-48
7-9
7-11
7-25
7-26
7-28
10-2
Rev. 4
761 662
(PR80030l)
1-2
1-4
2-3
2-4
2-5
2-6
2-10
3-ii
3-21
3-22
5-23
5-24
5-32
6-9
FAA Approval
Signature and
Date
W~
Ward Evans
Sept. 14, 1979
Revised Figure 1-1.

Revised para. 1.7, 1.9 and U I.
Revised para. 2.7
Revised para. 2.11.
Revised para. 2.13.
Revised para. 2.23.
Added serial number effectivity
Added para. 3.37.
Added para. 3.37.
New page, contino para.
3.37.
Moved revised Figure 6-9
to pg. 6-10.
REPORT: VB-860
vi-e

Revision
Number and
Code
Rev. 4 (cont)
Revised
Pages
I 6-10
I
Added revised Figure 6-9;
revised Figure 6-11

. tomoved
pg. 6-IOa.
;
6-lOa
I
I
6-IOb
6-12
6-15
6-28
6~41
6-41a
6-41b
7-i
7-3
7-4
7-26
7-27
7-37
8-11
8-lIa
8-llb
FAA Approval
Signature and
Date
9-i
9-23
thru
9-26
9-27
thru
9-30
REPORT: VB-860
vi-'
New page; added revised

Figure 6-11.
New page.
Revised sample problem.
Added item 125.
Added items 238 & 240;
moved items 241. 242 and
243 to pg. 6-41a.
Relocated items 241. 242,
243; moved items 249 and
251 to pg. 6-4Ib.
Relocated items 249 and
251.
Added para. 7.41.
Revised Figure 7-1.
Revised Figure 7-3.
Revised para 7.23
New page; added para. 7.41.
Revised para. 8.19, and
para. 8-21.
New page; cont. revised
para. 8.21.
New page; cont. revised
para. 8.21
Added Supplements 4 and 5.
Added pages (Supplement 4).
Added pages (Supplement 5).
l\)0I\1.
Ward Evans
March I. 1980
<;

Revision
Number and
Code
Rev. 5
761 662
(PR800926)
Revised
Pages
Title
Publ
2-9
2-10
4-9
4-11
4-18
4-23
5-5
5-7
5-23
6-1
6-4
6-6
6-22
6-26
6-26a
6-26b
6-27
6-28
6-28a
6-28b
6-2<i
FAA Approval
Signature and
Date
Revised title pg.
Revised Warning.
Revised Takeoff and Landing
checklists; relocated placard
to pg 2-10.
Added placard from pg. 2-9.
Revised Before Takeoff
checklist.
Revised Approach and Landing
Revised para. 4 27.
Revised para 4.37
Revised item 5.5 (c).
Revised items 5.5 (e), (f) and (g)
Revised pg nos.
Revised Figure 6-3.
Revised Figure 6-5.
Added items 59 and 61.
Added item 104: relocated
item to pg. 6-26a.
Added pg. (added items from
pgs. 6-26 and 6-27).
Added pg
Relocated items to pg. 6-26a,
added item from pg. 6-28
Relocated item to pg 6-27
Added pg.
Added pg. (added items from
pg 6-29; added item 131\: revised item no )
Relocated items to pg. 6-28b;
revised item no ; added items
142, 143 and 144
REPORT: VB-860
vi-g

Revision
Number and
Code
Rev. 5(cont)
I
Revised
Pages
6-35
Revised item no.

Relocated items to pg. 6-36d:
added items 193 and 194.
Added pgs. (added items
200 thru 212).
6-3/i
6.16a,
6-36b,
636c
6-36d
637,
638,
6-39
6-40
6-41
6-41a
6-41b
6-42
6-44
6-45
6-48
6-49
I
6-50
REPORT: VB-860
vi-h
Added pg. (added renumbered

items from pg. 6-36).
Renumbered items.
Renumbered items: added items
229 and 230; relocated items
to pg. 6-41.
Added items from pg. 6-40; renumbered items; relocated item
to pg. 6-4Ia.
Added item from pg. 6-41;
renumbered items: added
items 243 and 245: relocated
items to pg. 6-4Ib.
Added items .from pg. 6-41 a;
renumbered item: relocated
item to pg. 6-42.
Added item from pg. 6-4Ib.
Added item 277 from pg. 6-45.
Relocated item to pg. 6-44: renumbered item: added item
281.
Added item 353.
Renumbered and relocated
item to pg. 6-50; added new
item 375.
Renumbered items: relocated
info. to pg. 6-5 I; added item
from pg. 6-49; added new
items 377 and 379.
FAA Approval
Signature and
Date

Revision
Number and
Code
Revised
Pages
Rev 5(eont)
6-51
Added pg (added info from

pg 6-50).
Revised Figure 7-25
Revised para. 7.27
7-18
7-20
7-26
7-30,
7-31
8~9
9-i
9-31
thru
9-36
9-37
thru
9-40
9-41
thru
9-52
9-53.
9-54
9-55
thru
9-60
9-61
thru
9-66
9-67
thru
9-72
9-73
thru
9-76
Rev 6
761 662
(PRSOII19)
2-3
2-4
2-5
6-24
FAA Approval
Signature and
Date
Revised Figure R-9

Added Supplements 6 thru 13
Added Supplement 6
(Air Conditioning)
Added Supplement 7
(Century 21 Autopilot)
Added Supplement 8
(Century 41 Autopilot)
Added Supplement 9
(Control Wheel Clock)
Added Supplement 10
(WeatherScout II Radar)
Added Supplement II
(RDR-160 Radar)
Added Supplement 12
(RDR-160/lN-2026A Radar)
Added Supplement 13
(Color WeatherScout II Radar)
WQI\R
Watd Evans
26. 19S0
~Cpl
Revised para 27
Revised para 29. moved
para 2 II 10 pg 2-5
Relocated para 2 II from pg 2-4 Ward Evans
Delcted items 79 and 81
Nov 19. 1980
WOAJ
REPORT: VB-860
vi-i

Revision
Number and
Codes
Rev. 7
761 662
(PR810105)
Revised
Pages
24
3-i. ',it
3-5
Revised 2.9 (c).
I Changed page numbers.
Revised Air Start

(Unfeathering Procedure).
Revised Electrical Failures.
3-7
Moved info. to pg. 3-lOa;
3-8
cont. Electrical Failure.
Moved info. to pg. 3-IOb;
3-9
cont. Electrical Failure.
3-10
Cont. Electrical Failure.
3-tOa New page; relocated info.
from pg. 3-8.
3-IOb New page; relocated info.
from pg. 3-9.
3-13 Revised engine failure during
takeoff (75 KIAS and above).
3-15
Revised Air Start
(Unfeathering Procedure).
3-16
Moved para. 3.11 to pg. 3-17;
cont. Air Start.
3-17
Relocated para. 3.11 from
pg.3-16.
3-19
Revised para. 3.23.
3-20
Moved para. 3.25 and para.
3.27 to pg. 3-22; cont. para.
3.23 revision.
3-21
Moved para. 3.29, 3.31, 3.33
and 3.35 to pg. 3-23 and para.
3.35 and 3.37 to pg. 3-24;
cont. para. 3.23 revision.
32~
pg. 3-20; moved part of para.
3.37 to pg. 3-24.
3-23
New page; relocated para.
3.29, 3.31 and 3.35 from pg.
3-21.
REPORT: VB-860
vi-j
FAA Approval
Signature and
Date
!
.... . . . .
, .... l:.
&
Revision
Number and
Codes
Revised
Pages
Rev. 7 (cont)
3-24
New page; relocated para.

3.37 from pg. 3-21 and 3-22
Added item 180; moved item
185 to pg. 6-35.
Relocated item 185 from rg
6-35; moved items 191 and
192 to pg. 6-36.
from pg. 6-36.
Revised para. 7.17.
Cont. para. 7.17 revision.
Deleted info.
Added info.
6-34
6-35
6-36
7-16
7-17
7-19
7-21
9-77
Rev. 8
761 662
(PR81041O)
3-3
3-13
4-i
4-18
4-19
5-23
6-25
6-26
6-34
6-39
thru
6-42
6-49
FAA Approval
Signature and
Date
tJ~t;:'
Ward Evans
Jan 5,1981
Revised Warning.
Added Warning.
Changed pg. no. for para.
4.27.
Revised para. 4.27; moved
para. 4.29 to pg. 4-19.
pg.4-18.
Revised fig. 5-25.
Revised items 99 and 10 I.
Revised item 178.
Added new item 228; moved
and renumbered items 228
thru 252; revised new item
244.
Revised item 375.
REPORT: VB860
vik

Revision
Number and
Codes
Revised
Pages
Rev.8(cont)
i;
() "0
7- s 1
i-2U
925
9-41
Rev. 9
761 662
(PR810724)
1-5
2-9
3-2
3-12
4-4
4-5
4-9
4-11
4-12b
4-13
j'"
4-14
4-15
4-17
4-18
4-19
4-20
4-23
4-24
I
4-25
REPORT: VB860
vi I
Revised
Revised
Revised
Revised
Revised
items 377 and 379.

fig. 7-15.
fig. 7-19.
Sec. 4 (b) (8) a and b.
Sec. 2 (c).
Revised para. 1.13.

Revised check list.
Revised procedure.
Revised procedure.
Moved info. to pg. 4-4;
revised procedure.
Revised procedure.
Revised procedure.
Revised Caution.
Added Note; moved para.
4.15 to pg. 4-14.
Relocated para. 4.15; moved
info. to pg. 4-15.
Moved info. to pg. 4-17;
added Note; moved info. to
pg.4-19.
Relocated info. from pg. 4-18;
moved info. to pg. 4-20.
info. to 4-24.
moved para. 4.47 to pg. 4-26.
FAA Approval
Signature and
Date
l')QJ-!l &~.,
Ward Evans
April 10, 1981

Revision
Number and
Codes
Revised
Pages
Rev. 9 (cont)
4-26

pg. 4-25; moved info to
pg.4-27.
Revised para. 5.5 (a) (6).
Revised para. 5.5 (e) (4) (6);
(f) (l); (g) (I)
Revised fig. 5-31.
Revised fig. 5-37.
Revised fig. 5-39.
Added item 136.
Moved item 159 to pg. 6-31
Relocated item 159; added
item 164; moved item 165
and 167 to pg. 6-32.
from pg. 6-31; moved item
171 to pg. 6-33.
Relocated item 171 from
pg. 6-32; moved item 175 to
pg.6-34.
Relocated item 175 from
pg. 6-33; moved items 179
thru 183 to pg. 6-35.
from pg. 6-34.
Revised item 194.
Renumbered items; moved
renumbered items to pg.
6-38a.
New page; added items 229
and 231; relocated renumbered item from pg. 6-3g
New page; relocated
renumbered items from
pg. 6-39.
4-27
5-3
5-7
5-26
5-29
5-30
6-28b
6-30
6-31
6-32
6-33
6-34
6-35
6-36
6-38
6-38a
6-38b
FAA Approval
Signature and
Date
REPORT: VB-860
vi-m

Revision
Number and
Codes
Revised
Pages
Rev. 9 (cont)
6-39
Moved renumbered items to

pg. 6-38b; relocated renumbered items from pg. 6-40;
added item 247.
Moved renumbered items
to pg. 6-39; relocated renumbered items from pg. 6-41.
Moved renumbered items to
pg. 6-40; renumbered items.
Revised item 273; renumbered items; relocated
renumbered item from
pg. 6-41b.
Moved renumbered item to
pg. 6-4Ia; renumbered items.
Renumbered items.
i
6-40
6-41
6-41a
6-41b
6-42
thru
6-47
6-51
7-19
7-21
Rev. 10
761 662
(PR820122)
I-i
2-4
2-5
2-6
2-7
2-8
2-9
3-10
REPORT: VB-860
vi-n
Added item 389; removed

info.
info. to pg. 7-21.
Correct page numbers.
Revised para. 2.9; move info.
to pg. 2-5.
Revised procedure.
FAA Approval
Signature and
Date
(J~
Ward Evans
July 24, 1981
-~

FAA Approval
Signature and
Date
Revision
Number and
Code
Revised
Pages
Rev. 10
(cont)
3-12
4-23
Revised para 4.37.

info to pg. 4-24.
revised para. 4.37; moved
info to pg. 4-25.
Relocated info from pg 4-24
Revised para. 5.5.
4-24
4-25
5-3
thru
5-7
6-6
6-17
6-24
6-40
6-45
7-30
7-31
7-32
9-21
9-25
Rev II
761 662
(PR830314)
Title
I-I
1-9
2-i
3-i
3-ii
4-i
4-ii
4-13
4-18
4-2.1
Revised fig. 6-5.

Revised para. 6.11.
Added items 79 and 81.
Revised item 255.
Added item 324.
info. to pg. 7-31.
Relocated info. from pg. 7-31
Revised section 3(a).
Revised section .4(b), (8)c.
Revised bottom para.
Revised para. 1.1
Deleted MEA.
Revised index.
Added info to 3.3; relocated
items to pg. 3-ii.
Added items from pg. 3 i
Added info to 4.5.
Added items from pg 4-i
Revised Ist para and 1'" ote
Revised Note
Revi<;ed Note
(JQlJ
Ward bans
Jan 22. 19H2
REPORT: VB-860
vi-o

RevIsion
FMApproval
Number and Revised
Description of Revisions
Signature
Code
Pages
and Date
Rev.n
(cont)
'5-27
thtu
5-:;0
6-28
6-36
7-6
7-21
7-32
8-2
8-3
8-4
9-i
9-79
thru
9-82
Rev. 12
761662
(pR890304)
l-i
1-12
1-13
thnJ
1-21
3-1
3-17
4-5
4-8
4-11
4-13
4-17
4-24
8-1
thru
8-3
8-10
thru
8-11
REPORT: VB860
vi.p
Revised fig. 6-33 thnJ 5-39.

Revised item 127.
Revised 2nd para.
Added Caution.
Revised para. 7.29 and 7.33.
Revised para. 8.3.
Revised 1st para. and para.
8.5.
Moved text.
Added Supplement No. 14 to
index.
Added Supplement No. 14.
tJ-At
Ward Evans
March 14, 1983
Revised index.
Para. 1.21 deleted.
Para. 1.21 deleted,
pages removed.
Revised para. 3.1.
Revised para. 3.11.
Revised Before Starting
Engines.
Revised Before TakeoffGround Check.
Revised Approach and
Landing.
Revised para. 4.13.
Revised para. 4.27.
Revised para. 4~37.
Revised para. 8-1 and 8.3.
~
D.H. Trompler
Revised para. 8.19.
..l!!lY. 6. J989
Date
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 1
GENERAL
SECTION 2
LIMITATIONS
SECTION 3
EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
SECTION 4
NORMAL PROCEDURES
SECTION 5
PERfORMANCE
SECTION 6
WEIGHT AND BALANCE
SECTION 7
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION Of

THE AIRPLANE AND ITS SYSTEMS
SECTION 8
AIRPLANE HANDLING. SERVICING

AND MAINTENANCE
SECTION 9
SUPPLEMENTS
SECTION 10
SAfETY TIPS
REPORT: VB-SliD
vii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 1
GENERAL
Paragraph
Page
No
11
I 3
I5
I7
1.9
I II
1.13
1.15
I 17
1.19
No
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Propeller
...................................
Fuel.............................................
Oil...............................................
Maximum Weights
Standard Airplane Weights........
Baggage Space..........................
Specific Loadings..................................
Symbols, Abbreviations and Terminology. ..... .... . . .
I-I
1-3
1-3
1-4
1-4
1-4
1-5
1-5
1-5
1-6
REPORT: VB860
(-j
PIPER AIRCRAFT CORPORATION

PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
SECTION I
GENERAL
SECTION I
GENERAL
U INTRODUCTION
This Pilot's Operating Handbook is designed for maximum utili7ation
as an operating guide for the pilot. It includes the materiallequired to be
furnished to the pilot by the Federal Aviation Regulations and additional
information provided by the manufacturer and constitutes the FAA
Approved Airplane Flight Manual
This handbook is not designed as a substitute for adequate and
competent flight instruction, knowledge of current airworthiness directives,
applicable federal air regulations or advisory circulars It is not intended to
be a guide for basic flight instruction or a training manual and should not be
used for operational purposes unless kept in a current status
Assurance that the airplane is in an airworthy condition is the responsibility of the owner The pilot in command is responsible for determining thai
the airplane is safe for flight. The pilot is also responsible for remaining
within the operating limitations as outlined by instrument markings,
placards, and this handbook.
Although the arrangement of this handbook is intended to increase its
in-flight capabilities, it should not be used solely as an occasional operating
reference. The pilot should study the entire handbook to become familiar
with the limitations, performance, procedures and operational handling
characteristics of the airplane before flight.
The handbook has been divided into numbered (arabic) sections, each
provided with a "finger-tip" tab divider for 4t!i~'k rderence The
limitations and emergency procedures have been placed ahead of the normal
procedures, performance and other sections to provide easier access to
information that may be required in flight The "Emergency Procedures"
Section has been furnished with a red tab divider to present an instant
reference to the section Provisions for expansion of the handbook have
been made by the deliberate omission of certain paragraph numbers, figure
numbers, item numbers and pages noted as being intentionally left blank.
ISSUED: MARCH 23, 1978
REVISED: MARCH 14, 1983
REPORT: VB-860
I-I
SECTION 1
GENERAL

PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
Wing Area (sq. ft.)

183.8
Min. Turning Radius (ft.)
33.0
(from pivot point to wingtip)
----=-11.114..
-1
1~--3rIl"-'---
THREE VIEW
Figure I-I
REPORT: VB-860
1-1
ISSUED: MARCH 13. 1978

PA-44180, SEMINOLE
SECTION 1
GENERAL
1.3 ENGINE
(a) Number of Engines
(b) Engine Manufacturer
(c) Engine Model Number
Left
Right
(d) Rated Horsepower
(e) Rated Speed (rpm)
(f) Bore (in.)
(g) Stroke (in.)
(h) Displacement (cu. in.)
(i) Compression Ratio
0) Engine Type
2
Lycoming
0-360-E IA6D
LO-360-E I A6D
180
2700
5.125
4.375
361
9.00:1
Four Cylinder, Direct

Drive, Horizontally
Opposed, Air Cooled
1.5 PROPELLER
STANDARD
(a) Number of Propellers
(b) Propeller Manufacturer
(c) Model
Left
Right
(d) Number of Blades
(e) Propeller Diameter (in.)
(I) Maximum
(2) Minimum
(f) Propeller Type
OPTIONAL
(a) Number of Propellers
(b) Propeller Manufacturer
(c) Model
Left
Right

REVISED: DECEMBER 15, 1978
2
Hartzell
HC-C2Y(K,R)-2CEUF/
FC7666A-2R
HC-C2Y(K,R)-2CLEUF/
FJC7666A-2R
2
74
72
Constant Speed,
Hydraulically Actuated,
Full Feathering
2
Hartzell
HC-C3YR-2EUFj
FC-7663-SR
HC-C3YR-2LEUF/
FJC-7663-SR
REPORT: VB860
13
SECTION 1
GENERAL

PA-44180, SEMINOLE
3
(d) Number of Blades

(e) Propeller Diameter (in.)
(I) Maximum
(2) Minimum
<0 Propeller Tvpe
73
72
Constant Speed,
Hydraulically Actuated,
Full Featheriong
1.7 FUEL
110
108
(a) Fuel Capacity (U.S. gat) (total)

(b) Usable Fuel (U.S. gaL) (total)
(c) Fuel
(I) Minimum Grade
100 Green orlOOLL

Blue Aviation Grade
Refer to latest
revision of Lycoming,
Service Instruction 1070.
(2) Alternate Fuel
t.9 OIL
(a) Oil Capacity (U.S. qts.) (per engine)
(b) Oil Specification
(c) Oil Viscosity
6
Refer to latest issue
of Lycoming Service
Instruction 1014 and
Service Bulletin No. 446.
Refer to Section 8 paragraph 8.19.
U 1 MAXIMUM WEIGHTS
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
Maximum Takeoff Weight (lbs.)

Maximum Ramp Weight
Maximum Landing Weight (Ibs.)
Maximum Weights in Baggage
Compartment (Ibs.)
REPORT: VB-860
1-4
3800
3816
3800
200


pA..... UIO. SEMINOLE
SECTION t
GENERAL
U3 STANDARD AIRPLANE WEIGHTS

Refer to Figure 6-5 for the Standard Empty Weight and the Useful
load.
1.15 BAGGAGE SPACE
(a) Compartment Volume (cu. ft.)
(b) Entry Width (in.)
(c) Entry Height(in.)
24
22
20
U7 SPECIFIC LOADINGS
(8) Wing loading (lbs. per sq. ft.)
(b) Power loading (Ibs. per hp)

REVISED: JULY 14, 1981
21.1
10.55
REPORT: VB860
15
SECTION 1
GENERAL

PA-44-180. SEMINOLE
1.19 SYMBOLS, ABBREVIATIONS AND TERMINOLOGY

The following definitions are of symbols, abbreviations and terminology used throughout the handbook and those which may be of added
operational significance to the pilot.
(a) Geneull
Air~pcetj
Terminology and Symbols
CAS
Calibrated Airspeed means the indicated

speed of an aircraft, corrected for position
and instrument error. Calibrated airspeed
is equal to true airspeed in standard
atmosphere at sea level.
KCAS
Calibrated Airspeed expressed in "Knots."
GS
Ground Speed is the speed of an airplane

relative to the ground.
lAS
Indicated Airspeed is the speed of an aircraft as shown on the airspeed indicator

when corrected for instrument error. lAS
values published in this handbook assume
zero instrument error.
KIAS
Indicated Airspeed expressed in "Knots."
Mach Number is the ratio of true airspeed

to the speed of sound.
TAS
True Airspeed is the airspeed of an airplane

relative to undisturbed air which is the
CAS corrected for altitude, temperature
and compressibility.
Maneuvering Speed is the maximum speed
at which application of full available
aerodynamic control will not overstress the
airplane.
Maximum Flap Extended Speed is the
highest speed permissible with wing flaps
in a prescribed extended position.
REPORT: VD-860
1-6

PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
SECTION 1
GENERAL
VlE
Maximum landing Gear Extended Speed

is the maximum speed at which an aircraft
can be safely flown with the landing gear
extended.
VlO
Maximum landing Gear Operating Speed

is the maximum speed at which the landing
gear can be safely Lxtendcd or retracted.
YMCA
Air Minimum Control Speed is the minimum flight speed at which the aiJplane is
directionally controllable as determined in
accordance with Federal Aviation Regulations. Airplane certification conditions
include one engine becoming inoperative
and wind milling, not more than a 5 bank
towards the operative engine, takeoff
power on operative engine, landing gear
up, flaps in takeoff position, and most
rearward e.G.
VNE/MNE
Never Exceed Speed or Mach Number is

the speed limit that may not be exceeded at
any time.
VNO
Maximum Structural Cruising Speed is the

speed that should not be exceeded except
in smooth air and then only with caution.
VS
Stalling Speed or the minimum steady

night speed at which the airplane is controllable
VSO
Stalling Speed or the minImum steady

night speed at which the airplane is
controllable in the landing configuration.
VSSE
Intentional One fngine Inoperative Speed

is a minimum speed seb.:ted by the manufacturer for intentionally rendering one
engine inoperative in flight for pilot
training.
REPORT: VB-860
1-7
SECTION I
GENERAL

PA-44-180. SEMINOLE
vx
Best Angle-of-Climb Speed is the airspeed

which delivers the greatest gain of altitude
in the shortest possible horizontal distance.
Vy
Best Rate-of-Climb Speed is the airspeed

which delivers the greatest gain in altitude
in the shortest possible time.
(b) Meteorological Terminology

ISA
International Standard Atmosphere in

which the air is a dry perfect gas, the
temperature at sea level is 15 Celsius (59
Fahrenheit), the pressure at sea level is
29.92 inches Hg (1013 mb), and the temperature gradient from sea level to the
altitude at which the temperature is -56.5C
(-69.7F) is -0.00198C (-0.003566 F) per
foot and zero above that altitude.
OAT
Outside Air Temperature is the free air

static temperature obtained either from
infiight temperature indications or ground
meteorological sources, adjusted for instrument error and compressibility effects.
Indicated
Pressure Altitude
The number actually read from an

altimeter when the barometric subscale has
been set to 29.92 inches of mercury (1013
millibars).
Pressure Altitude
Altitude measured from standard sea-level

pressure (29.92 in. Hg) by a pressure or
barometric altimeter. It is the indicated
pressure altitude corrected for position and
instrument error. In this handbook,
altimeter instrument errors are assumed
to be zero.
Station Pressure
Actual atmospheric
elevation.
REPORT: VB-860
1-8
pressure at field

REVISED: DECEMBER IS, 1978

PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
Wind
SECTION I
GENERAL
The wind velocities recorded as variables

on the charts of this handbook are to be
understood as the headwind or tailwind
components of the reported winds
(c) Power Terminology

Takeoff Power
Maximum power permissible fOl takeoff
Maximum Continuous Power
Maximum power permissible continuously

during night
Maximum Climb
Power
Maximum power permissible during

climb.
Maximum Cruise
Power
Maximum power
cruise
permissible during
(d) Engine Instruments

EGT Gauge
Exhaust Gas Temperature Gauge
(e) Airplane Performance and Flight Planning Terminology

Climb Gradient
The demonstrated ratio of thc change in

height during a portion of a climb, to the
horizontal distance traversed in the same
time interval
Demonstrated
Crosswind
Velocity
(DEMO
X-WIND)
The demonstrated crosswind velocity is the

velocity of the crosswind component for
which adequate control of the airplane
during takeoff and landing was actually
demonstrated dUring eCllilication tests
Accelerate-Stop
Distance
The distance required to accelerate an airplane to a specified speed and, assuming

failure of an engine atlhe instant that speed
is attained, to bring the ai rplane to a stop

REVISED: MARCH 14,1983
REPORT: VB-860
1-9
SECTION 1
GENERAL
Route Segment

PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
A part of a route. Each end of that part is
identified by (I) a geographical location
or (2) a point at which a definite radio fix
can be established.
(f) Weight and Lhlhnce Terminology
Reference Datum
An imaginary vertical plane from which all

horizontal distances are measured for
balance purposes.
Station
A location along the airplane fuselage

usually given in terms of distance in inches
from the reference datum.
Arm
The horizontal distance from the reference

datum to the center of gravity (C.G.) of an
item.
Moment
The product of the weight of an item multiplied by its arm. (Moment divided by a
constant is used to simplify balance calculations by reducing the number of digits.)
Center of Gravity
(CG.)
The point at which an airplane would

balance if suspended. Its distance from the
reference datum is found by dividing the
total moment by the total weight of the
airplane.
CG. Arm
The arm obtained by adding the airplane's

individual moments and dividing the sum
by the total weight.
CG Limits
The extreme center of gravity locations

within which the airplane must be operated
at a given weight.
Usable Fuel
Fuel available for night planning.
Unusable Fuel
Fuel remaining after a runout test has been

completed in accordance with governmental regulations.
REPORT: VB-860
1-10

PA44180, SEMINOLE
SECTION 1
GENERAL
Standard Empty
Weight
Weight of a standard airplane including

unusable fuel, full operating fluids and full
oil.
Basic Empty
Weight
Standard empty weight plus optional

equipment
Payload
Weight of occupants, cargo and baggage.
Useful Load
Difference between takeoff weight, or ramp

weight if applicable, and basic empty
weight.
Maximum Ramp
Weight
Maximum weight approved for ground

maneuver. (It includes weight of start, taxi
and run-up fuel).
Maximum
Takeoff Weight
Maximum weight approved for the start of

the takeoff run.
Maximum
Landing Weight
Maximum weight approved for the landing

touchdown.
Maximum Zero
Fuel Weight
Maximum weight exclusive of usable fuel.
REPORT: VB860
lU
SECTION 1
GENERAL
PIPER AlRCRAFf CORPORATION

PA44180, SEMINOLE
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFf BLANK
REPORT: VB860
112
ISSUED: MARCil 23, 1978

TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 2
UMITATIONS
Paraglaph
No
Page
No
21
2.3
2-1
25
27
29
2 II
2 13
2 15
2 17
2 19
221
223
225
227
General
.
.
Airspccd I.imitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .
Ailspccd Indicator Markings
.
Powcr Pia nt l.imitations
.
Power Plant Instrumcnt Markings
.
Weighl l.imits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. ..
Center or Gravity Limits
.
Mancuvcr Limits
.
Flight Mancllvering Load Faclors
.
Types or Opcllition
.
Fucl Limitations
.
Noisc I.evel
.
Gyro Suction Limits
"
.
.
Placards
.
2-1
2-2
2-3
24
2-5
2-5
2-5
2-6
2-6
2-6
2-6
2-7
2-7
REPORT: VB860
2-j
It
!
I

PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
SECTION 2
LIMITATIONS
SECTION 2
LIMITATIONS
2.1 GENERAL
This section provides the "FAA Approved" operating limitations,
instrument markings, color coding and basic placards necessary for the
safe operation of the airplane and its systems.
This airplane must be operated as a normal category airplane in
compliance with the operating limitations stated in the form of placards
and markings and those given in this section and handbook.
Limitations associated with those optional systems and equipment
which require handbook supplements can be found in Section 9
(Supplements).
2.3 AIRSPEED LIMITATIONS
SPEED
KIAS
Design Maneuvering Speed (VA) - Do not

make full or abrupt control movements
above this speed.
38001bs.
27001bs.
135
112
KCAS
133
112
CAUTION
Maneuvering speed decreases at lighter weight

as the effects of aerodynamic forces hccome
more pronounced. Linear interpolation may
be used for intermediate gross weights.
Maneuvering speed should not be exceeded
while operating in rough air.
REPORT: VB-860
2-1
SECTION 2
LIMITAnONS
PIPER AIRCRAFT CORPORAnON

PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
SPEED
KIAS
Never Exceed Speed (VNE) - Do not exceed

this speed in any operation.
202
194
MaKimum Str\1ctuml Cruising Speed

(VNO) - D0 not el{~'eed this speed except
in smooth air and then only with caution.
169
165
Maximum Flaps Extended Speed (VFE) Do not exceed this speed with the flaps
extended.
III
109
Maximum Gear Extended Speed (VLE) Do not exceed this speed with landing
gear extended.
140
138
Maximum Landing Gear Extending

Speed (VLO) - Do not extend landing gear
above this speed.
140
138
Maximum Landing Gear Retracting

Speed (VLO) - Do not retract landing gear
above this speed.
109
109
Air Minimum Control Speed (VMCA) Lowest airspeed at which airplane is controllable with one engine operating and no
flaps. Note: This is a stalled condition.
56
63
One Engine Inoperative Best Rate of

Climb Speed~
88
90
KCAS
2.5 AIRSPEED INDICATOR MARKINGS

MARKING
lAS
Red Radial Line (Never Exceed)
202 KTS
Red Radial Line (One Engine Inoperative

Air Minimum Control Speed)
REPORT: VB-860
2-2
56 KTS

REVISED: SEPTEMBER 14, 1979
SECTION 2
LIMITATIONS

PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
MARKING
lAS
Blue Radial Line (One Engine Inoperative

Best Rate of Climb Speed)
88 KTS
Yellow Arc (Caution Range - Smooth

Air Only)
169 KTS to
202 KTS
Green Arc (Normal Operating Range)
57 KTS to
169 KTS
White Arc (Flap Down)
55 KTS to
III KTS
2.7 POWER PLANT LIMITATIONS

(a) Number of Engines
(b) Engine Manufacturer
(c) Engine Model No.
Left
Right
(d) Engine Operating Limits
(I) Maximum Horsepower
(2) Maximum Rotation Speed (RPM)
(3) Maximum Manifold Pressure
(4) Maximum Cylinder Head Temperature
(5) Maximum Oil Temperature
(e) Oil Pressure
Minimum
Maximum
(f) Fuel Pressure
Normal Operating Range (green arc)
Minimum (red line)
Maximum (red line)
(g) Fuel (minimum grade)
(h) N umber of Propellers
ti) Propeller Manufacturer
(j) Propeller Hub and Blade Models
(I) Standard (Two Blade)
Left
Right

REVISED: NOVEMBER 19, 1980
2
Lycoming
0-360-E I A6D
LO-360-E IA6D
180
2700
Full Throttle
500F
145F
15 PSI
115 PSI
5 PSI to 8 PSI
.5 PSI
8 PSI
100 or 100LL
A\iation Grade
1
Harl7ell
HC-C1Y(K,R)-2CEUF I
FC7666A-1R
HC-C2Y( K,R)-lCLEU F I
FJC7666A-1R
REPORT: VB-860
2-3
SECTION 2
LIMITATIONS

PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
(2) Optional (Three Blade)

Left
HC-C3YR-2EUF I
FC-7663-5R
HC-C3YR-2LEUF I
FJC-7663-5R
Right
(k) Propeller Dbrnder
(I) Standard (Two Blade)
Maximum
Minimum
(2) Optional (1 hree Blade)
Maximum
Minimum
74 IN.
72 IN.
73 IN.
72 IN.
2.9 POWER PLANT INSTRUMENT MARKINGS

(a) Tachometer
Red Line (Maximum)
(b) Oil Temperature
Red Line (Maximum)
(c) Oil Pressure
Yellow Arc (Caution Range) (Idle)
Yellow Arc (Warm Up, Taxi & T.O.)
Red Line (Minimum)
Red Line (Maximum)
or
Red Line (Minimum)
Red Line (Maximum)
or
Red Line (Minimum)
Red Line (Maximum)
(d) Fuel Pressure
Red Line (Minimum)
Red Line (Maximum)
REPORT: VB-860
2-4
500 to 2700 RPM

2700 RPM
60 PSI to 90
25 PSI to 60
90 PSI to 100
25
100
PSI
PSI
PSI
PSI
PSI
60 PSI to 90
15 PSI to 60
90 PSI to 115
15
115
PSI
PSI
PSI
PSI
PSI
55 PSI to 90
15 PSI to 55
90 PSI to 115
15
115
PSI
PSI
PSI
PSI
PSI
.5 PSI to 8 PSI
.5 PSI
8 PSI

REVISED: JANUARY 22, 1982

PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
(e) Cylinder Head Temperature
Green Arc (Normal Range)
Red Line (Maximum)
SECTION 2
LIMITATIONS
200 to 435 F
500F
2.11 WEIGHT LIMITS

(a) Maximum Takeoff Weight
(b) Maximum Ramp Weight
(c) Maximum Landing Weight
(d) Maximum Weight in Baggage
Compartment
38001bs.
38161bs.
38001bs.
2001bs.
2.13 CENTER OF GRAVITY LIMITS

Weight
Pounds
Forward Limit
Inches Aft of Datum
Rearward Limit
Inches Aft of Datum
2800
3400
3800
84.0
85.0
89.0
93.0
93.0
93.0
NOTES
Straight line variation between points given.

The datum used is 78.4 inches ahead of the
wing leading edge at wing station 106.
It is the
and the
properly
Balance)
responsibility of the airplane owner

pilot to insure that the airplane is
loaded. See Section 6 (Weight and
for proper loading instructions.
2.15 MANEUVER LIMITS

All intentional acrobatic maneuvers (including spins) ale prohibited.
Avoid abrupt maneuvers.

REPORT: VB-860
2-5
SECTION 2
LIMITATIONS

PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
2.17 FLIGHT MANEUVERING LOAD FACTORS

(a) Positive Load Factor (Maximum)
(I) Flaps Up
(2) Flaps Down
(b) NegalIVe Lond Factor (Maximum)
3.8 G
2.0 G
No inverted maneuvers
approved.
2.19 TYPES OF OPERATION

The airplane is approved for the following operations when equipped
in accordance with FAR 91 or FAR 135.
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
Day V.F.R.
Night V.F.R.
Day I.F R.
Night I.F.R.
Non Icing
2.21 FUEL LIMITATlONS

(a) Total Capacity
(b) Unusable Fuel
The unusable fuel for this airplane has
been determined as 1.0 gallon in each
nacelle in critical flight attitudes.
(c) Usable Fuel
The usable fuel in this airplane has
been determined as 54 gallons in each
nacelle or a total of 108 gallons.
110 U.S. GAL.

2 U.S. GAL.
108 U.S. GAL.
2.23 NOISE LEVEl,

The corrected noise level of this aircraft is 74.7 d B(A) with the two blade
propeller and 75.6 d R(A) with the three blade propeller.
No determination has been made by the Federal Aviation
Administration that the noise levels of this airplane are or should be
acceptable or unacceptable for operation at, into, or out of, any airport.
REPORT: VB-860
2-6


PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
SECTION 2
LIMITATIONS
The above statement notwithstanding, the noise level stated above has
been verified by and approved by the Federal Aviation Administration in
noise level test flights conducted in accordance with FAR 36, Noise
Standards - Aircraft Type and Airworthiness Certification fhis aircraft
model is in compliance with all FAR 36 noise standards applicable to this
type
2,25 GYRO SUCTION LIMITS
lhe operating limits for the suction system are 4.5 to 5.2 inches of
mercury for all operations as indicated by the gyro suction gauge
2.27 PLACARDS
In full view of the pilot:
The markings and placards installed in this airplane
contain operating limitations which must be complied with
when operating this airplane in the normal category Other
operating limitations which must be complied with when
operating this airplane in this category are contained in the
airplane flight manual. No acrobatic maneuvers, including
spins, approved
This aircraft approved for V.F R , I.F.R., day and night
non-icing flight when equipped in accordance with FA R 91
or FAR 135.
On instrument panel in full view of the pilot:
DEMONSTRATED CROSSWIND COMPONENT 17 KTS
OR
DEMO X-WIND 17 KTS
ONE ENGINE INOPERATIVE
AIR MINIMUM CONTROL SPEED 56 KIAS

REPORT: VB-860
2-7

PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
SECTION 2
LIMITATIONS
WARNING - TURN OFF STROBE LIGHTS

WHEN IN CLOSE PROXIMITY TO
GROUND, OR DURING FLIGHT
rHROllGH CLOUD, FOG OR HAZE.
On instrument panel in full view of the pilot:

MANEUVERING SPEED
135 KIAS AT 3800
LBS. (SEE AFM)
OR
VA 135 AT 3800 LBS
(SEE P.O. H.)
GEAR DOWN
GEAR UP
EXTENDED
140 KIAS (MAX.)

109 KIAS (MAX.)
140 KIAS (MAX.)
OR
Vw 140 DN, 109 UP
VLE 140 MAX.
Near emergency gear release:

EMERGENCY GEAR EXTENSION
PULL TO RELEASE. SEE AFM
BEFORE RE-ENGAGEMENT
Near gear selector switch:

GEAR UP
UOWI\1
109 KIAS MAX.

140 KIAS MAX.
Adjacent to upper door latch:

ENGAGE LATCH BEFORE FLIGHT
REPORT: VB-860
1-8

SECTION :2
LIMITATIONS

PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
On inside of baggage compartment door.
BAGGAGE MAXIMUM 200 LBS
On storm window:
DO NOT OPEN ABOVE 129 KIAS
TAKEOFF CHECK LIST
Fuel Selectors On
Electric Fuel Pumps On
Alternators On
Engine Gauges Checked
Mixtures Set
Primers Locked
Propellers Set
Carb Heat Off
Cowl Flaps Set

Seat Backs Erect
Flaps Set
Trim Set (Stab. & Rudder)
Fasten Beltsl Harness
Controls Free - Full Travel
Doors latched
Air Conditioner Off
LANDING CHECK LIST

Mixtures Rich
Propellers Set
Gear Down - 140 KIAS Max.
Flaps Set - III KIAS Max.
Air Conditioner Off
Seat Backs Erect

Fasten Belts! Harness
Fuel Selectors On
Cowl Flaps Set
OR
LANDING CHECK LIST

Seal Backs Erect
Fasten Beltsl Harness
Fuel Selectors On
Cowl Flaps Set

MixtUics Rich
Propellt:t " Set
Gear Down (til ern Arc)
Flaps Set - (White Arc)
Air Conditioner Off
The "AIR CONDITIONER OFF" item in the above takeoff and

landing check lists is mandatory for air conditioned aircraft only.
REPOR f: VB-860
2-9
SECTION 2
LIMITATIONS

PA-44-180, SEMINOLE

ONE ENGINE INOPERATIVE STALLS
NOT RECOMMENDED. CAN CAUSE 300
FT. LOSS OF ALTITUDE AND 30 PITCH
ANGI. F
In full view of the pilot when the oil cooler winterization kit is installed:
OIL COOLER WINTERIZATION PLATE
TO BE REMOVED WHEN AMBIENT
TEMPERATURE EXCEEDS 50F.
On the vertical window post between the first and second left side
windows and close to the Emergency Exit release handle:
EMERGENCY EXIT
PULL HANDLE FORWARD
PUSH WINDOW OUT
Adjacent to fuel tank filler caps (Prior to Serial Number 44-7995002):
FUEL ONLY
GRADE MIN. 54 GAL.
100/130 AVIATION
USABLE CAPACITY
OR
Adjacent to fuel tank filler caps (Serial Number 44-7995002 and up):
FUEL 100 OR 100LL AVIATION GRADE
REPORT: VB-860
2-10

TABLE Of CONTENTS
SECTION 3
Paragraph
Page
No.
3.1
3.3
3.5
3.7
3.9
3.11
3 13
3.15
3.17
3.19
321
323
No
General .........................................
Emergency Procedures Checklist
.
.
Airspeeds For Safe Operations
Engine Inoperative Procedures
.
Fire
.
Fuel Management During One Engine Inoperative
Operation
.
Engine Driven Fuel Pump Failure
.
Landing Gear Unsafe Warnings
.
.
Manual Extension of landing Gear
Gyro Suction Failures
.
Electrical Failures
.
Electrical Overload (Alternators Over 30 Amp~
Above Known Electrical Load)
.
Spin Recovery (Intentional Spins Prohibited)
.
Open Door (Entry Door Only)
.
Propeller Overspeed
.
Emergency Exit
.
Amplified Emergency Procedures (General)
.
Engine Inoperative Procedures
.
Fire
.
Fuel Management During One Engine Inoperative
Operation
.
Engine-Driven Fuel Pump Failure
.
Landing Gear Unsafe Warnings
.
.
.
Manual Extension Of The Landing Gear .. .
,
.
Gear-U p Emergency landing
Gyro Suction Failures
.
Electrical Failures
.
3-1
3-2
3-2
3-2
3-5
3-6
3-6
3-6
3-7
3-7
3-7
3-10
3-IOa
3-lOb
3-IOb
3-lOb
3-11
3-11
3-16
3-17
3-17
3-18
3-18
3-18
3-19
3-19
REPORT: VB-860
3-i
TABLE OF CONTENTS (cont)

SECTION 3 (cont)
Paragraph
3.25
3.27
3.29
3.31
3.33
3.35
3.37
Page
No.
No.
Spins. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Open Door
.............................
Propeller Overspeed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Combustion Heater Overheat.............
Emergency Descent .. " . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .
Emergency Exit
, ............ , .
Carburetor Icing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . .. . . . . . . . . . . .
REPORT: VB-860
3-ii
3-22
3-22
3-23
3-23
3-23
3-23
3-24

SECTION 3
PA44180, SEMINOLE
SECTION 3
3.1 GENERAL
This section provides the recommended procedures for coping with

various emergency or critical situations. All of the emergency procedures
required by the FAA as well as those necessary for operation of the airplane,
as determined by the operating and design features of the airplane, are
presented.
Emergency procedures associated with optional systems and equipment
which require handbook. supplements are provided by Section 9,
Supplements.
This section is divided into two basic parts. The first part contains the
emergency procedures checklists. These checklists supply an immediate
action sequence to be followed during critical situations with little emphasis
on the operation of the systems.
The second part of the section provides amplified emergency procedures
corresponding to the emergency procedures checklist items. These amplified
emergency procedures contain additional information to provide the pilot
with a more complete description of the procedures so they may be more
easily understood.
Pilots must familiarize themselves with the procedures given in this
section and must be prepared to take the appropriate action should an
emergency situation arise. The procedures are offered as a course of action
for coping with the particular situation or condition described. They are not
a substitute for sound judgment and common sense.
Most basic emergency procedures are a normal part of pilot training.
The information presented in this section is not intended to replace this
training. This information is intended to provide a source of reference for the
procedures which are applicable to this airplane. The pilot should review
standard emergency procedures periodically to remain proficient in them.

REPORT: VB-860
31
SEC110N 3
PIPER AIRCRAFT CORPORA110N
PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
3.3 EMERGENCY PROCEDURES CHECK LIST
AIRSPEEDS FOR SAFE OPERA110NS
One engine inoperative air minimum control .......... S6
One engine inoperative best rate of climb ........ 88
One engine inoperative best angle of climb ............ 82
Maneuvering ................................. 13S
Never exceed ................................ 202
KIAS
KIAS
KIAS
KIAS
KIAS
ENGINE INOPERATIVE PROCEDURES

DETECTING DEAD ENGINE
Loss of thrust.
Nose of aircraft will yaw in direction of dead engine (with coordinated
controls).
ENGINE SECURING PROCEDURE (FEATHERING PROCEDURE)
Minimum control speed ................... S6 KIAS
One engine inoperative best rate of climb ........ 88 KIAS
Maintain direction and airspeed above 82 KIAS.
Mixture controls ........................... forward
Propeller controls ......................... forward
Throttle controls .......................... forward
Flaps .
retract
Gear ................................. retract
Identify inoperative engine.
retard to verify
Throttle of inop. engine
0
0.' "
0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To attempt to restore power prior to feathering:

Mixtures ....................... as required
Fuel selector
ON
Primers
".. ~ .
locked
Magnetos ........................ left or right only
Electric fuel pump .................... check ON
Carburetor heat
"
ON
Prop control of inop. engine ............. feather before RPM
drops below 9S0
Mixture of inop. engine ................... idle cut-off
II
II
"
II
REPORT: VB-NO
3-1
41 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
II .. ..
ISSUED: MARCH 13, 1'78


SECTION 3
PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
Trim ........................ as required (30 to 5 of bank toward
operative engine - ball !.-S to ~ out)
Electric fuel pump of inop. engine .......................... OFF
Magnetos of inop. engine ................................. OFF
Cowl flaps ................................. close on inop. engine,
as required on operative engine
Alternator of inop. engine ............................... OFF
Electrical load ............... '" ......................... reduce
Fuel selector ................................ OFF inop. engine,
consider crossfeed
Electric fuel pump operative engine ......................... OFF
ENGINE FAILURE DURING TAKEOFF (Below 75 KIAS)
If engine failure occurs during takeoff and 75 KIAS has not been attained:
Throttles CLOSE both immediately
Stop straight ahead.
If inadequate runway remains to stop:
Throttles
CLOSED
Brakes ................................... apply max. braking
Master switch ............................................ OFF
Fuel selectors ......................................... OFF
Continue straight ahead, turning to avoid obstacles.
ENGINE FAILURE DURING TAKEOFF (75 KIAS or above)

If engine failure occurs during takeoff ground roll or after lift-off with gear
still down and 75 KIAS has been attained:
If adequate runway remains CLOSE both throttles immediately, land if
airborne and stop straight ahead.
If runway remaining is inadequate for stopping, decide whether to abort or
continue. If decision is made to continue, maintain heading and when climb
is established retract landing gear, accelerate to 88 KIAS, and feather
inoperative engine prop (see Engine Securing Procedure).
WARNING
In certain combinations of aircraft weight,

configuration, ambient conditions and speed,
negative climb performance may result. Refer
to One Engine Inoperative Climb Performance
chart, Figure 5-25.

REVISED: APRIL 10, 1981
REPORT: VB-860
3-3
SECTION 3
PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
ENGINE FAILURE DURING FLIGHT (below 56 KIAS)'
Rudder ........................ apply toward operative engine
Throttles (both). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . retard to stop turn
Pitch attitude ............... lower nose to accelerate above 56 KIAS
Operative engine ....................... increase power as airspeed
increases above S6 KIAS
If altitude permits, a restart may be attempted. If restart fails or if altitude

does not permit restart, see Engine Securing Procedure.
ONE ENGINE INOPERATIVE LANDING
Inop. engine prop .......................... feather
When certain of making field:
Landing gear .................................... extend
Wing flaps ................... '. .......................... lower
Maintain additional altitude and speed during approach.
Final approach speed ............................ 90 KIAS
Wing flaps ................................... 2S0
ONE ENGINE INOPERATIVE GO-AROUND
(SHOULD BE AVOIDED IF AT ALL POSSIBLE)
Mixture ......................................... forward
Propeller .............................................. forward
Throttle .................................... open slowly
Flaps ................................................ retract
Landing gear ..................................... retract
Airspeed ........................................... 88 KIAS
Trim ................................................... set
Cowl flap operating engine ...................... as required
REPORT: VB-8CiO
3-4


SECTION 3
PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
AIR START (UNfEATHERING PROCEDURE)
Fuel selector inop. engine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. ON
Electric fuel pump inop. engine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. ON
Prop control ................................... forward to cruise
RPM position
Mixture ................................................ RICH
Throttle ............................... two full strokes and
then open 1{4 inch
Magneto switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. ON
Starter .............................. engage until prop windmills
Throttle ...................... reduce power until engine is warm
If engine does not start, prime as required.
Alternator ............................................ ON
FIRE
ENGINE FIRE ON GROUND
If engine has not started:
Mixture ......................................... idle cut-off
Throttle ........ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. open
Starter ....................................... crank engine
If engine has already started and is running, continue operating to try
pulling the fire into the engine.
If fire continues, extinguish with best available means.
If external fire extinguishing is to be applied:
fuel selector valves ................................. Off
Mixture .......................................... idle cut-off
ENGINE fIRE IN fLIGHT
Affected engine:
Fuel selector
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. OFf
Thr:ottle
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . close
Propeller ............................................ feather
Mixture ....................................... idle cut-off
Cowl flap ............................... ' , .......... OPEN
If terrain permits land immediately.

REPORT: VB-860
3-5
SECTION 3
PA-44-180. SEMINOLE
FUEL MANAGEMENT DURING ONE ENGINE INOPERATWE
OPERATION
CRUISING
When using fuel fron: !r:nk on the same side as the operating engine:
Fuel selector operating engine
ON
Fuel selector mop engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. OFF
Electric fuel pumps
" OFF
(except in case of engine driven pump
failure. electric fuel pump on operating
engine side must be used)
When using fuel from tank on the side opposite the operating engine:
Fuel selector operating engine ....................... CROSS FEED
Fuel selector inop. engine
OFF
Electric fuel pumps
OFF
(except in case of engine driven pump
failure, electric fuel pump on operating
engine side must be used)
NOTE
Use crossfeed in level cruise flight only.
LANDING
Fuel selector operating engine ................................ ON
Fuel selector inop engine ................................ " OFF
ENGINE DRIVEN FUEL PUMP FAILURE
Electric fuel pump
LANDING
(~EAR
ON
IrNSAFE WARNINGS
Red light indicates gear intransit

Recycle gear if indication continnes.
Light will illuminate and gear horn sounds when the gear is not down and
locked if throttles are at low settings or wing flaps are in second or third
notch position.
REPORT: VB-8M
3-6

REVISED: SEPTEMBER 14, 197q

SECTION 3
PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
MANUAL EXTENSION OF LANDING GEAR
Check following before extending gear manually:
Circuit breakers ................................... check
Master switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ON
Alternators ......................................... check
Navigation lights .................................. OFF
(daytime)
To extend, proceed as follows:
Airspeed ...................... reduce (100 KIAS max.)
Gear selector ............................... GEAR DOWN
LOCKED position
Emerg. gear extend knob ................................ pull
Indicator lights .................................. 3 green
Leave emergency gear extension knob out.
GYRO SUCTION FAILURES
Suction below 4.5 in. Hg.
RPM ................................... increase to 2700
Altitude ...................... descend to maintain
4.5 in. Hg.
Use electric turn indicator to monitor Directional Indicator and Attitude
Indicator performance.
ELECTRICAL FAILURES
ALT annunciator light illuminated
Ammeters ................... check to determine
inoperative alternator
If one ammeter shows zero

Inop. ALT switch .................................. OFF
Reduce electrical loads to minimum
ALT circuit breaker.
Check and reset

as required
Inop. ALT switch ................................. ON

REPORT: VB-IUiO
3-7
SEcnON 3
PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
If power is not restored
Inop. ALT switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. OFF
Electrical loads ................... Re-establish to
60 amps max.
If both ammeters show zero

ALT switches .................................. Both OFF
ALT circuit breakers
Check both and reset

as required
ALT switches .......................... ON one at a time
Determine ALT showing LEAST (but not zero) amps
ALT switches ............................. Least load ON
other OFF
Electrical loads ............................ Re-establish to
60 amps. max.
FOR AIRPLANES WITH INTERLOCKED MASTER AND ALT

SWITCH OPERATION
If alternator outputs are NOT restored

Alt switches ..................................... OFF
Electrical loads
Reduce to minimum
Land as soon as practical. The battery is the only remaining source of
electrical power. Anticipate complete electrical failure.
WARNING
Compass error may exceed 10 degrees with
both alternators inoperative.
NOTE
If the battery is depleted, the landing gear must
be lowered using the emergency gear extension
procedure. The gear position lights will be
inoperative.
REPORT: VB-860
3-8


SECTION J
PA-44-1118. SEMINOLE
EME.RGENCY PROCEDURES
FOR AIRPLANES WITH SEPARATE BAT AND AlT SWITCH
OPERATION
BAT switch .............................................. OFF
AlT switches ................................. ON one at a time
If one or both alternator outputs are restored

Electrical loads
Reduce to minimum
land as soon as practical. The alternator(s) is the only remaining source of

electrical power.
NOTE
Due to increased system voltage and radio
frequency noise, operation with AlT switch
ON and BAT switch OFF should be made only
when required by an electrical system failure.
AlT switches ................................... OFF
Electrical loads ............................. Reduce to minimum
land as soon as practical. The battery is the only remaining source of

electrical power. Anticipate complete elec~rical system failure.
WARNING
NOTE
inoperative.

REVISED: JANUARY 5. 8980
REPORT:
VB-~O
3-9
SECTION 3
PA-4+180, SEMINOLE
ELECTRICAL OVERLOAD (ALTERNATORS OVER 30 AMPS
ABOVE KNOWN ELECTRICAL LOAD)
SWITCH OPERATION
Electrical load ................................ Reduce
If alternator loads are NOT reduced
ALT switches .......................................... OFF
Land as soon as possible. The battery is the only remaining source of

FOR AIRPLANES WITH A SEPARATE BAT AND ALT SWITCH
OPERATION
ALT switches ........................... ON
BAT switch ...... , ........................ OFF
If alternator loads are reduced. this indicates a malfunction of the battery
and lor battery wiring.
Electrical loads ............................. Reduce to Min.
Land as soon as practical. The alternator(s) is the only remaining source of

electrical power.
NOTE
Due to increased system voltage and radio
frequency noise. operation with ALT switches
ON and SAT switch OFF should be made only
when required by an electrical failure.
If alternator loads are NOT reduced

ALT switches ............................... OFF
SAT switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. As required
Electrical loads .................... Reduce to minimum
Land as soon as practical. The battery is the only remaining source of
REPORT: VB-860
3-10

REViSED: JANUARY 11, 1981

SECTION 3
PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
WARNING
NOTE
If the battery is depleted. the landing gear must

be lowered using the emergency gear :xtension
inoperative.
SPIN RECOVERY (INTENTIONAL SPINS PROHIBITED)
Throttles .......................................... retard to idle
Rudder
full opposite to
direction of spin
Control wheel
release back pressure
Control wheel
, full forward if
nose does not drop
Ailerons .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. neutral
Rudder
neutralile when
rotation stops
Control wheel
smooth back pressure
to recover from dive
NOTE
Federal Aviation Administration Regulations

do not require spin demonstration of
multi-engine airplanes; therefore. spin tests
have not been conducted. The recovery
technique presented is based on the best
available information
ISSUED: JANUARY 5, 1981
REPORT: VB-860
3-IOa
SECTION 3
PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
OPEN DOOR (ENTRY DOOR ONLY)
If both upper and side latches are open, the door will trail slightly open and
airspeeds will be reduced slightly.
To close the dnor 10 fl!iht.

Slow airplane to 82 KI\S.
Cabin vents
Storm window
, close
, ............................... open
If upper latch is open ...................................... latch

pull on armrest while
moving latch handle
to latched position
If side latch is open
If both latches are open
latch side latch

then top latch
PROPELLER OVERSPEED
Throttle ............................................... retard
Oil pressure .............................................. check
Prop control ............................... full DECREASE rpm,
then set if any
control available
Airspeed ............................................... reduce
Throttle ............................... as required to remain
below 2700 rpm
EMERGENCY EXIT
Remove thermoplastic cover.
Pull handle forward
Push window C1ut
REPORT: VB-llfiO
3-IOb

SECTION 3
PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
3.S AMPLIFIED EMERGENCY PROCEDURES (GENERAL)
The following paragraphs are presented to supply additional
information for the purpose of providing the pilot with a more complete
understanding of the recommended course of action and probable cause of
an emergency situation.
3.7 ENGINE INOPERATIVE PROCEDURES
DETECTING A DEAD ENGINE
A loss of thrust will be noted and with coordinated controls, the nose of
the aircraft will yaw in the direction of the dead engine.
ENGINE SECURING PROCEDURE (FEATHERING PROCEDURE)
Keep in mind that the one engine inoperative air minimum control
speed is 56 KIAS and the one engine inoperative best rate of climb speed is
88 KIAS when beginning the feathering procedure.
To feather a propeller, maintain direction and an airspeed above 82
KIAS. Move the mixture and propeller controls forward. The throttle
controls should be moved forward to maintain a safe airspeed. Retract the
flaps and landing gear and identify the inoperative engine. The airplane will
yaw in the direction ofthe dead engine. Retard the throttle ofthe inoperative
engine to verify loss of power.
NOTE
If circumstances permit, in the event of an
actual engine failure, the pilot may elect to
attempt to restore power prior to feathering.
If circumstances permit an attempt to restore power prior to feathering,
adjust the mixture control as required, move the fuel selector control toON,
che,ck primers locked and select either L (left) or R (right) magneto. Move
the carburetor heat control to ON and the electl ic fuel pump to the ON
position. If power is not immediately restored turn off the electric fuel
pump.

REPORT: VB-860
3-11
SECTION 3
PA-44-180. SEMINOLE
The propelIers can be feathered only while the engine is rotating above
950 RPM. Loss of centrifugal force due to slowing RPM wiII actuate a stop
pin that keeps the propelIer from feathering each time the engine is stopped
on the ground. One engine inoperative performance wiII decrease if the
. propelIer of the- inoperative engine is not feathered.
The propdici control of the inoperative engine should be moved to the
feather positi{'fj. ,\lid [he mixture control of the inoperative engine should
be moved to idle cUhllf.
Trim the aircraft as required and maintain a 3 to 5 bank toward the

operating engine. The balI wiII be Y2 to ~ out for minimum drag. The electric
fuel pumps should be bff except in the case of an engine-driven fuel pump
failure. Turn OFF the magnetos and close the cowl flaps on the inoperative
engine. Cowl flaps should be used as necessary on the operative engine.
The alternator of the inoperative engine should be turned OFF and the electricalload reduced to prevent depletion of the battery. Move the fuel selector
control for the inoperative engine to the OFF position. If necessary. consider
the use of crossfeed (refer to Fuel Management During One Engine Inoperative Operation, paragraph 3.11). Turn OFF the operative engine's electric
fuel pump.
NOTE
When an engine is feathered, the alternator,
gyro air. and oil annunciator warning lights
will remain illuminated.
ENGINE FAILURE DURING TAKEOFF (Below 75 KIAS)
The one engine inoperative air minimum control speed for this airplane
is 56 KIAS under standard conditions.
NOTE
This is a stalIed condition.
REPORT: VB-860
3-12

REVISED: JANUARY 22.1982

SECTION J
PA-~4-180, SEMINOLE
If engine failure occurs during takeoff ground roll and 75 KIAS has not
been attained, CLOSE both throttles immediately and stop straight ahead.
If inadequate runway remains to stop, close the throttles and apply
maximum braking. The master switch and fuel selectors should be turned
OFF. Continue path straight ahead turning to avoid obstacles as necessary.
ENGINE FAILURE DURING TAKEOFF (75 KIAS or above)

If engine failure occurs during takeoff ground roll or aftel lift-off with
the gear still down and 75 KIAS has been attained the course of action to be
taken will depend on the runway remaining. If adequate runway remains,
CLOSE both throttles immediately, land if airborne and stop straight
ahead. If the runway remaining is inadequate for stopping, the pilot must
decide whether to abort the takeoff or to continue. The decision must be
based on the pilot's judgment considering loading, density altitude,
obstructions, the weather, and the pilot's competence. If the decision is
made to continue the takeoff, maintain heading and airspeed, RETRACT
the landing gear, accelerate to 88 KIAS and FEATHER the inoperative
engine (refer to Engine Securing Procedure).
WARNING
In certain combinations of aircraft weight,
configuration, ambient conditions and speed,
negative climb performance may result. Refer
to One Engine Inoperative Climb Performance
chart, Figure 5-25.
.
ENGINE FAILURE DURING FLIGHT (Below 56 KIAS)
Should an engine fail during flight at an airspeed below 56 KIAS, apply
rudder towards the operative engine to maintain directional control. The
throttles should be retarded to stop the yaw force produced by the
inoperative engine. Lower the nose of the aircraft to accelerate above 56
KIAS and increase the power on the operative engine as the airspeed
exceeds 56 KIAS.
After an airspeed above 56 KIAS has been established, an engine restart
attempt may be made if altitude permits. If the restart has failed, or if
altitude does not permit, the engine should be secured. see Engine Securing
Procedure.

REPORT: VB-860
3-13
SECTION 3
PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
REPORT: VB-860
3-14

REVISED: DECEM8ER 15, 1978

SECTION 3
PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
ONE ENGINE INOPERATIVE LANDING
Complete the Engine Securing Procedure. The landing gear should not
be extended and the wing naps should not be lowered until certain of making
the field.
Maintain additional altitude and speed during approach, keeping in
mind that landing should be made right the first time and that a go-around
should be avoided if at all possible.
A final approach speed of 90 KIAS and the use of 25 0 rather than full
wing naps will place the airplane in the best configuration for a go-around
should this be necessary.
WARNING
Under some conditions of loading and density
altitude a go-around may be impossible, and in
any event the sudden application 01 power
during one engine inoperative operation makes
control of the airplane more difficult.
ONE ENGINE INOPERATIVE GO-AROUND
NOTE
A one engine inoperative go-around should be
avoided if at all possible.
To execute a one engine inoperative go-around, advance the mixture
and propeller levers forward. The throttle should be advanced slowly to the
full forward position. Ret~act the naps and landing gear. Maintain airspeed
at the one engine inoperative best rate of climb speed of 88 KIAS. Set the
trim and cowl flaps as required.
AIR START (UNFEATHERING PROCEDURF)
Move the fuel selector for the inoperative engine to the ON position and
check to make sure the electric fuel pump for that engine is ON. Push the
propeller control forward to the cruise RPM position and the mixture
should be set RICH. Push in full throttle twice and then open it 1/4 inch.

REVISED: JANUARY 5, 19tH
REPORT: VB-860
3-15
SECTION 3
PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
Turn ON the magneto switches and engage the starter until the propeller
windmills. The throttle should be set at reduced power until the engine is
warm. If the engine does not start, prime as necessary. The alternator switch
should then be turned ON.
3.9 FIRE
ENGINE FIRE ON THE GROUND
The first attempt to extinguish the fire is to t(y to draw the fire back into
the engine. If the engine has not started, move the mixture control to idle
cut-off and open the throttle. Begin to crank the engine with the starter in an
attempt to pull the fire into the engine.
If the engine has already started and is running, continue operating to
try to pull the fire into the engine.
In either case (above), if the fire continues longer than a few seconds the
fire should be extinguished by the best available external means.
If an external fire extinguishing method is to be applied move the fuel
selector valves to OFF and the mixture to idle cut-off.
ENGINE FIRE IN FLIGHT

The possibility of an engine fire in flight is extremely remote. The
procedure given below is general and pilot judgment should be the deciding
factor for action in such an emergency.
If an engine fire occurs in flight, place the fuel selector of the affected
engine in the OFF position and close its throttle. Feather the propeller on
the faulty engine. Move the mixture control to idle cut-off. The cowl flap
should be open. A landing should be made if terrain permits.
REPORT: VB-860
3-16

REVISED: JANUARY S, 1981

SECTION 3
PA44-180, SEMINOLE
3.11 FUEL MANAGEMENT DURING ONE ENGINE INOPERATIVE
OPERATION
A crossfeed is provided to increase range during one engine inoperative
operation. Use crossfeed in level flight only.
CRUISING
When using fuel from the fuel tank on the same side as the opemting
engine, the fuel selector of the operating engine should be ON and the fuel
selector for the inoperative engine should be OFF. The electric fuel pumps
should be OFF except in the case of an engine-drivenfuel pumpfailure.lfan
engine-driven fuel pump has failed, the electric fuel pump on the opemting
engine side must be ON.
Increased range is available by using fuel from the tank on the opposite
side of the operating engine. For this configuration the fuel selector of the
operating engine must be on X- FEED (crossfeed) and the fuel selector of the
inoperative engine must be OFF. The electric fuel pumps should be OFF.
Crossfeed is approved for level cruise flight only.
LANDING
During the landing sequence, the fuel selector of the operating engine
must be ON and the fuel selector of the inoperative engine OFF. The electric
fuel pump of the operating engine should be ON.
3.13 ENGINEDRIVEN FUEL PUMP FAILURE
Loss of fuel pressure and engine power can be an indication offailure of
the engine-driven fuel pump. Should these occur and engine-driven fuel
pump failure is suspected, turn ON the electric fuel pump.
CAUTION
If normal engine operation and fuelllo'" is not

immediately re-established, the eledric fuel
pump should be turned off. The lack of a fuel
flow indication while on the electric fuel pump
could indicate a leak in the fuel system, or fuel
exhaustion

REPORT: VB-84iO
3-17
SECTION 3
PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
3.15 LANDING GEAR UNSAFE WARNINGS
The red landing gear light will illuminate when the landing gear is in
transition between the full up position and the down and locked position.
The pilot should recycle the landing gear if continued illumination of the
light occurs. Additionally, the light will illuminate when the gear warning
horn sounds. The gear warning horn will sound at low tbrottle settings if the
gear is not down and locked, and when wing flaps are in the second or third
notch position and the gear is not down and locked.
3.n
MANUAL EXTENSION OF THE LANDING GEAR
Several items should be checked prior to extending the landing gear

manually. Check for popped circuit breakers and ensure the master switch is
ON. Then check the alternators. If it is daytime, turn OFF the navigation
lights.
To execute a manual extension of the landing gear, power should be
reduced to maintain airSpeed below 100 KIAS. Place the landing gear
selector switch in the GEAR DOWN position and pull the emergency gear
extension"knob. Check for 3 green indicator lights.
WARNING
If the emergency gear extension knob has been
pulled out to lower the gear due to a gear
system malfunction, leave the control in its
extended position until the airplane has been
put on jacks to check tbe proper function of
the landing gears hydraulic and electrical
systems.
3.19 GEAR-UP EMERGENCY LANDING

An approach should be made with power at a normal airspeed with the
flaps up. The flaps are left up to reduce wing and flap damage. Close the
throttles just before touchdown. Turn OFF the master and ignition switches
and move the fuel selector valve controls to OFF. Contact to the surface
should be made at a minimum airspeed.
REPORT: VB860
318


SECTION 3
PA-44-180. SEMINOLE
3.21 GYRO SUCTION FAILURES
A malfunction of the instrument suction system will be indicated by a
reduction of the suction reading on the ga uge. A red button annunciator will
show in case of a feathered engine or vacuum pump failure
In the event of a suction system malfunction, (suc:tion lower than 4.5
inches of mercury) increase engine RPM to 2700. Descend to an altitude at
which 4.5 inches of mercury suction can be maintained, if possible. The
electric turn indicator should be used to monitor the performance of the
directional and attitude indicators.
3.23 ELECTRICAL FAILURES
I r one ammeter shows zero output, turn its switch OFF. reduce electrical
loads to a minimum and check its circuit breaker. Reset if required. Turn
ALT switch ON. If the alternator remains inoperative, repeat the above
procedure one more time. If the alternator still remains inoperative, turn
ALT switch OFF, maintain an electrical load of 60 amps maximum on the
operating alternator and exercise judgment regarding continued flight.
If both ammeters show zero output, turn both ALT switches OFF and
reduce electrical loads to a minimum. Check both alternator circuit breakers
and reset if required. Turn ALT switches ON one at a time while observing
the ammeters. The alternator showing the"LEAST (but not zero) output,
should be turned ON and the other alternator should be left OFF. Electrical
loads may be re-established as required to a maximum of 60 amps.
SWITCH OPERATION
If neither alternator output can be restored, both alternator switches
should be left OFF. Reduce electrical load to essential systems and land as
soon as practical. The battery is the only remaining source of electrical
power.
WARNING
both alternators inoperative

REPORT: VB-SCiO
3-19
SECTION 3
/
PA44180, SEMINOLE
NOTE
inopc,<>.tive.
FOR AIRPl.ANES WITH SEPARATE BAT AND ALT SWITCH
OPERATION
If alternator outputs are not restored, turn BAT switch OFF, ALT
switches OFF, then ON one at a time. If one or both alternator outputs are
restored. leave the BAT switch OFF and land as soon as practical. This
condition is an indication of a battery and/ or battery wiring malfunction.
NOTE
Operation with the ALT switches ON and the
BAT switch OFF should be made only when
required by an electrical failure, due to
increased system voltage and radio frequency
noise.
If neither alternator output can be restored, turn both ALT switches
OFF and turn the BAT switch ON as required. Maintain a minimum electrical load and land as soon as practical. The battery is the only remaining
source of electrical power.
WARNING
NOTE
be lowel ed using the emergency extension
procedure The green position lights will be
inoperative
REPORT: VB860
3-20

REVISED: JANUARY S, 1981
PIPER AIRCRAFT CORPORA TION

SECTION 3
PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
ELECTRICAL OVERLOAD (ALTERNATORS OVER 30 AMPS
ABOVE KNOWN ELECTRICAL LOAD)
If abnormally high alternator outputs are observed and persist (more

than 30 amps above known electrical load for the operating conditions),
they may be caused by a low battery. a battery faull or other abnormal electrical load. If the cause is a low battery. the indication should begin to
decrease toward normal within 5 minutes. Ifthe overload condition persists
proceed as follows:
For airplanes with interlocked MASTER and ALT switches. reduce
electrical loads by turning off non-essential electrical equipment. If the loads
cannot be reduced. turn the ALT switches OFF, maintain minimum dectricalload and land as soon as practical. The battery is the only remaining
source of electrical power. Also anticipate complete electrical failure.
WARNING
NOTE
If the battery is depleted. the landing gear must
be lowered using the emergency extension
procedure. The green position lights will be
inoperative.
For airplanes with separate BAT and ALT switch operation. turn the
BAT switch OFF and the ammeter indication should decrease Turn the
BAT switch 0)\1 and continue to monitor the ammeter Should the alternator outputs not decrease within 5 minutes. turn the BAT switch OFF and
land as soon liS practical. All electrical loads are being supplied by the
alternators.
NOTE
Operation with the ALT switches O!'l and the
BAT switch OFF should be made only when
required by an electrical failure. due to
increased system voltage and radio frequency
noise

REPORT: VB-860
J-21
SECTION .3
PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
3.15 SPINS
Intentional spins are prohibited in this airplane. In the event a spin is
encountered unintentionaUy, immediate recovery actions must be taken.
To recove~ from an unintentional spin, immediately retard the throttles
to the idle position. Apply fun rudder opposite the direction of the spin
rotation. Let up aU back pressure on the control wheel. If the nose does not
drop, immediately push the control wheel full forward. Keep the ailerons
neutral. Maintain the controls in these positions until spin rotation stops,
then neutralize the rudder. Recovery from the resultant dive should be with
smooth back pressure on the control wheel. No abrupt control movement
should be used during recovery from the dive, as the positive limit
maneuvering load factor may be exceeded.
NOTE
Federal Aviation Administration Regulations
do not require spin demonstration of multiengine airplanes; therefore, spin tests have not
been conducted. The recovery technique
presented is based on the best available
information.
3.27 OPEN DOOR (ENTRY DOOR ONLY)
The cabin door is double latched, so the chances oHts springing open in
flight at both the top and side are remote. However, should you forget the
upper latch, or not funy engage the side latch, the door may spring partiaUy
open. This will usually happen at takeoff or soon afterward. A partially
open door will not affect normaUlightcharacteristics, and a normal landing
can be made with the door open.
If both upper and side latches are open, the door will trail slightly open,
and airspeed will be reduced slightly.
To close the door in flight, slow the airplane to 82 KIAS, close the cabin
vents and open the storm window. If the top latch is open,latch it. If the side
latch is open. pull on the armrest while moving the latch handle to the
latched position. If both latches are open, close the side latch then the top
latch.
REPORT: VB860
3-11


SECTION 3
PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
3.29 PROPELLER OVERSPEED
Propeller overspeed is usually caused by a malfunction in the propeller
governor which allows the propeller blades to rotate to full low pitch.
If propeller overspeed should occur, retard the throttle The propeller
control should be moved to full "DECREASE rpm" and then set ifanycontrol is available. Airspeed should be reduced and the throttle should be used
to maintain 2700 RPM.
3.31 COMBUSTION HEATER OVERHEAT
In the event of an overheat condition, the fuel, air and ignition to the
heater is automatically cut off Do not attempt to restart the heater until it
has been inspected and the cause of the malfunction has been determined
and corrected.
3.33 EMERGENCY DESCENT
In the event an emergency descent becomes necessary, CLOSE the
throttles and move the propeller controls full FORWARD Adjust the
mixture control as necessary to attain smooth operation Extend the landing
gear at 140 KIAS and maintain this airspeed
3.35 EMERGENCY EXIT
The pilot's left side window is an emergency exit. This is to be used when
emergency egress becomes necessary on the ground only. The emergency
exit release handle is located beneath the thermoplastic cover on the vertical
post between the 1st and 2nd left side windows. To exit the aircraft, remove
the thermoplastic cover, push the release handle forward and then push the
window out. The window then will fall free from the fuselage.
REPORT: VB-860
3-23
SECTION 3
PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
3.37 CARBURETOR ICING
Under certain moist atmospheric conditions at temperatures of -SoC to
20C. it is possible for ice to form in the induction system. even in summer
weather. This is due to the high air velocity through the carburetor venturi
and the absorption of heat from this air by vaporization of the fuel.
To avoid Lhis, carburetor preheat is provided to replace the heat lost by
vaporization. Carburetor heat should be full on when carburetor ice is
encountered. Adjust mixture for maximum smoothness.
REPORT: VB-860
324
T ABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION ..
NORMAL PROCEDURES
Paragraph
No.
4,1
4.3
4,5
4.7
49
4.11
4 13
415
Page
No
General
.
.
Airspeeds For Safe Operations
.
Normal Procedures Checklist.
Preparation
.
Preflight Check
.
.
Before Starting Engines
Starting Engines
.
Starting Engines In Cold Weather (Below 10 F)
.
Starting Engines When Hot ......................
Starting Engines When Flooded
.
Starting Engines With External Power
.
Warm-Up ................. ,
.
Taxiing
.
.
Before Takeoff - Ground Check
Takeoff
.
Takeoff Climb
.
.
Cruise Climb
Cruising
.
Descent
.
Approach and Landing
.
Go-Around
.
.
After Landing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .
Shutdown
.
Parking
.
.
Amplified Normal Procedures (General) '.. .. ,
Preparation
.
Preflight Check
.
.
Before Starting Engines
Starting Engines
.
4-1
4-2
4-3
4-3
4-3
4-5
4-5
4-6
4-6
4-7
4-7
4-7
4-8
4-8
4-9
4-10
4-10
4-10
4-11
4-11
4-11
4-11
4-12
4-12
4-12a
4-12a
4-12a
4-13
4-14
REPORT: VB-860
4-i
TABLE OF CONTENTS (cont)

SECTION 4 (cont)
Paragraph'
Page
No.
4.16
4.17
4.19
4.21
4.23
4.25
4.27
4.29
4.31
4 33
4.35
4.37
4.39
4.41
4.43
4.45
4.47
4.49
4.51
4.53
No.
Starting Engines In Cold Weather (Below 10F)

Starting Engines When HOI..............
..
Starting Engines When Flooded.....................
Starting Engines With External Power... .
..
Warm-Up..
Taxiing...........................................
Before Takeoff - Ground Check.... .... .. .. .. . ... .. .
Takeoff. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Climb
,...................
Cruising. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Descent. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Approach and landing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . .
Go-Around. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
After Landing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shutdown.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parking .... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Turbulent Air Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VSSF - Intentional One Engine Inoperative Speed......
YMCA - Air Minimum Control Speed.................
Stalls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
REPO~T:
4-ii
VB-860
4-14
4-15
4-15
4-15
4-17
4-17
4-17
4-19
4-20
4-21
4-22
4-23
4-25
4-25
4-25
4-25
4-26
4-26
4-26
4-27

PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
SECTION 4
NORMAL PROCEDURES
SECTION 4
NORMAL PROCEDURES
4.1 GENERAL
This section describes the recommended procedures for the conduct of
normal operations for the Seminole. All of the required (FAA regulations)
procedures and those necessary for the safe operation of the airplane as
determined by the operating and design features of the airplane are presented.
Normal procedures associated with those optional systems and equipment which require handbook supplements are provided by Section 9
(Supplements).
These procedures are provided to present a source of reference and
review and to supply information on procedures which are not the same for
all aircraft. Pilots should familiarize themselves with the procedures given
in this section in order to become proficient in the normal operations of the
airplane.
The first portion of this section consists of a short form check list which
supplies an action sequence for normal operations with little emphasis on
the operation of the systems.
The remainder of the section is devoted to amplified normal procedures
which provide detailed information and explanations ofthe procedures and
how to perform them. This portion of the section is not intended for use as
an in-flight reference due to the lengthly explanations. The short form check
list should be used for this purpose.
All data given is for both two and three blade propellers unless otherwise
noted.

REVISED: DECEMBER 15,1978
REPORT: VB-860
4-1
SECTION 4
NORMAL PROCEDURES

PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
4.3 AIRSPEEDS FOR SAFE OPERATIONS

The following airspeeds are those which are significant to the safe
operation of the airplane. These figures are for standard airplanes flown at
gross weight under standard conditions at sea level.
Performance lor a specific airplane may vary from published figures
depending upon the equipment installed; the condition of the engine,
airplane and equipment, atmospheric conditions; and piloting technique.
(a) Best Rate of Climb Speed
(b) Best Angle of Climb Speed
(c) Turbulent Air Operating Speed (See
Subsection 2.3)
(d) Maximum Flap Speed
(e) Landing Final Approach Speed (Flaps 40)
Short Field Effort,
(f) Intentional One Engine Inoperative Speed
(g) Maximum Demonstrated Crosswind Velocity
REPORT: VB-860
4-2
88 KIAS
82 KIAS
135 KIAS
III KIAS
75 KIAS
82 KIAS
17 KTS

SECTION 4
NORMAL PROCEDURES

PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
:
.: :
1" .. 1
---dlIllllP~",-
+
'"
+................................................\
.i
..........'
t
t
1:
+::.
.....".._
- ..._..._.....
:_..._.. _
. .._.....JI
......
WALK-AROUND
Figure 4-1
4.5 NORMAL PROCEDURES CHECK LIST
PREPARATION
Airplane status ....................... airworthy, papers on board
Weather ................................................ suitable
Baggage .................................. weighed, stowed, tied
Weight and C.G
within limits
Navigation ........................................... planned
Charts and navigation equipment ......................... on board
Performance and range ......................... computed and safe
PREFLIGHT CHECK
INSIDE CABIN
Landing gear control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DOWN position
Avionics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. OFF
REPORT: VB-860
4-3
SECTION 4
NORMAL PROCEDURES

PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
Master switch ............................................. ON

Landing gear lights
3 GREEN
Fuel quantity
adequate plus reserve
Cowl flaps .............................................. OPEN
Master switch ............................................. OFF
Ignition switches. .. "
OFF
Mixture controls ...................................... idle cut-off
Trim indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. neutral
Flaps ............................................ check operation
Controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. free
Pitot and static systems
drain
Empty seats .......................................... fasten belts
Emergency exit
closed and locked
OUTSIDE CABIN
Fuel sump drains
drain
Right wing, aileron and flap. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. check, no ice
Right main gear
~ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. no leaks
Strut
proper inflation
Tire
check
Right wing tip
check
Right leading edge
check, no ice
Fuel cap. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. open, check quantity and
color, secure
Right engine nacelle ................................... check oil
Right propeller ........................................... check
Cowl flaps ..................................... OPEN and secure
Fuel drains
drain
Nose section .............................................. check
Nose gear
no leaks
Strut ........................................... proper inflation
Tire ...................................................... check
removed and stowed
Tow bar
Landing light ............................................. check
Windshield ................................................ clean
Left wing, engine nacelle and landing gear .................. check as
on right side
Stall warning vanes
check
Pitot/static mast ................................... clear, checked
Dorsal fin air scoop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. clear
Empennage ........................................ check, no ice
Stabilator
free
REPORT: VB-860
4-4


PA-44-J80, SEMINOLE
SECTION 4
NORMAL PROCEDURES
Antennas .................................... check

Navigation and landing lights ............................... check
Baggage door .............................. secure and locked
BEFORE STARTING ENGINES
Seats ............................................. adjusted
Seat belts and harness
fasten/adjust
check inertia reel
Parking broke ............................................ set
Circuit breakers ......................................... in
Radios
OFF
Cowl flaps ........................................... OPEN
Carburetor heat
OFF
Alternators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. ON
Prop sync ............................................ MANUAL
STARTING ENGINES
Fuel selector .............................................. ON
Mixture ........................................ RICH
Throttle ......................................... 1/4 inch open
Propeller ................................... FORWARD
Master switch ....................................... ON
Electric fuel pump ..................................... ON
Ignition switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. ON
Propeller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . clear
Primer ............................................ as required
Starter ............................................ engage
Throttle ................................ adjust when engine starts
Oil pressure .............................................. check
Repeat for opposite engine.
Alternators .............................................. check
Gyro suction
check
NOTE
When starting at ambient temperatures +200 F
and below, operate first engine started with
alternator ON (at max charging rate not to
exceed 1500 RPM) for 5 minutes minimum
before initiating start on second engine.
ISSUED: MARCH 23, J978
REVISED: MARCH 4, J989
REPORT: VB-860
4-5
SECTION 4
NORMAL PROCEDURES

1'1\-44-180, SEMINOLE
STARTING ENGINES IN COLD WEATHER (BELOW 10F)

If available, preheat should be considered. Rotate each propeller through
10 blades manually during preflight inspection.
CAUTION
Insure magneto and master switches are OFF
and mixture controls are in idle cut-off before
turning propeller manually.
Master switch .......................................... OFF
External power "
connected (See
Starting Engines With
External Power)
Magnetos .............................................. OFF
Electric fuel pump .......................................... ON
Mixture ............................................. full RICH
Propeller .......................................... full forward
Throttle .......................................... 1/4 inch open
Primer ......................................... 5-10 strokes
Magnetos .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. ON
Starter .............................................. engage
Oil pressure .......................................... check
If engine does not start. add prime and repeat above. When engine fires,
pump primer as required until engine is running smoothly.
External power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. disconnected
Master switch ......................................... ON
STARTING ENGINES WHEN HOT
Throttle .................................... 1/2 inch open
Master switch ............................................ ON
Electric fuel pump .......................................... ON
Mixture .............................................. full RICH
Starter. . . . . . . . . . .. . .................................... engage
Throttle ................................................. adjust
Oil pressure ............................................. check
REPORT: VB-860
4-6
ISSlJED: MARCU 23, 1978


PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
SECTION 4
NORMAL PROCEDURES
STARTING ENGINES WHEN FLOODED

Mixture ............................................. idle cut-off
Throttle ............................................... open full
Propeller ............................................ full forward
Master switch ....................................... . . . . .. ON
Ignition switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. ON
Electric fuel pump ......................................... OFF
Starter................................................. engage
Throttle
retard
Mixture ............................................ advance
~
check
Oil pressure
STARTING ENGINES WITH EXTERNAL POWER
Master switch ............................................. OFF
All electrical equipment
" OFf
Terminals .......................................... connect
,External power plug .............................. insert in fuselage
Proceed with normal start.
Throttles
lowest possible RPM
WARNING
Shutdown the right engine when it is warmed
prior to disconnecting the external power plug.
External power plug ....................... disconnect from fuselage
Master switch ............................ ON - check ammeter
Oil pressure .......................................... check
Right engine ........................................... restart
WARMUP
Throttles
ISSIJED: MARCIl 13, 1978

" . 1000 to 1200 RPM
REPORT: VB860
4-7
SECTION ..
NORMAL PROCEDURES
PIPER AIRCRAFT CORPORA nON

PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
TAXIING
Chocks
removed
Taxi area ................................................. clear
Throttle
apply slowly
Brakes. . . . . . . . .. .
, .................................... check
Steering
, .......................................... check
'
check
Instruments
Heater and defroster ....................................... check
Fuel selector ................................. ON, check crossfeed
BEFORE TAKEOFF - GROUND CHECK
Parking brake ................................. . . . . . . . . . . .. ON
Mixture controls
FORWARD
Prop controls
FORWARD
Prop sync ............................................ MANUAL
1500 RPM
Throttle controls
Prop controls
check feathering,
500 RPM max. drop
Throttle controls ...................................... 2000 RPM
Prop controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. check governor
Prop controls
full FOR WARD
Carburetor heat.
check
Magnetos
check, max. drop
175 RPM, max. diff.
drop 50 RPM
Alternator output
check
Gyro suction gauge .............................. 4.8 to 5.2 in. Hg.
Throttles ........................................ 800-1000 RPM
Fuel selectors
ON
Electric fuel pumps
ON
Alternators ................................................. ON
Engine gauges
in the green
Annunciator pand .. ,
press-to-test
Altimeter
,
set
Attitude indicator
set
D.G
set
Oock
wound and set
Mixtures
set
Primers .................................................. locked
Propellers ................................ set in forward position
REPORT: VB860
4-8


PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
SECTION 4
NORMAL PROCEDURES
Quadrant friction
adjusted
Carburetor heat ...................................... OFF
Cowl flaps ............................................ set
Wing flaps
set
Trim .................................................... set
Seat backs
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. erect
Seat belts and harness ........................... fastened I adjusted
Empty seats
: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. seat belts fastened
Controls .......................................... free, full travel
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . latched
Air conditioner ................................. , .. OFF
Pitot heat ...................................... as required
TAKEOFF
CAUTION
Fast taxi turns immediately prior to takeoff
run should be avoided.
Adjust mixture prior to takeoff from high elevations. Do not over heat.
Adjust mixture only enough to obtain smooth engine operation.
NORMAL TAKEOFF (Flaps up)
Flaps .................................................. UP
Accelerate to 75 KIAS.
Control wheel ................................. ease back to rotate
to climb attitude
After breaking ground, accelerate to best rate of climb speed of 88 KIAS.
Gear ....................................................... UP
SHORT FJELD TAKEOFF (Flaps up)
Flaps ................................................ UP
Stabilator trim ...................................... takeoff range
Brakes ................................................. set
Full power before brake release.
Accelerate to 70 KIAS.
Control wheel ..................... . . . . .. rotate firmly to attain
75 KIAS through 50 ft.

REPORT: VB-860
4-9
SECTION 4
NORMAL PROCEDURES

PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
Accelerate to best angle of climb speed of 82 KIAS for obstacle clearance or

best rate of climb speed of 88 KIAS, no obstacle.
Gear .................................................... UP
SHORT FIELD TAKFOFF (25 Flaps)
Flaps ............... '
25 (second notch)
Stabilator triol. . . . . . .. . .................................... set
Brakes
set
Full power before brake release.
Accelerate to 63 KlAS.
Control wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. rotate firmly to attain
67 KIAS through 50 ft.
Gear .................................................... UP
TAKEOFF CLIMB
Best rate (flaps up) ................................... 88 KIAS
Best angle (flaps up)
82 KIAS
En route ............................................. 105 KIAS
Cowl flaps
as required
Electric fuel pump .................................... OFF at
desired altitude
CRUISE CLIMB
Mixture .............................................. full RICH
Power
75%
Climb speed ........................................... 105 KIAS
Cowl flaps .......................................... as required
CRUISING
Reference performance charts and Avco-Lycoming Operator's Manual.
Power ........................................ set per power table
Mixture controls
, adjust
Cowl flaps
as required
REPORT: VB-860
4-10


PA.-44-180, SEMINOLE
SECTION 4
NORMAL PROCEDURES
DESCENT
Mixtures ...................................... adjust with descent
Throttles .................................................... set
Cowl flaps
CLOSED
APPROACH AND LANDING
Gear warning horn ........................................ check
Seat backs .............................................. erect
Seat belts and harness ............................ fasten/adjust
Fuel selectors
"
ON
Cowl flaps ......................................... as required
Electric fuel pumps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. ON
Mixture controls ........................................... rich
Prop sync ............................................ MANUAL
Prop controls ................................... full FORWARD
Landing gear ............................. DOWN, 140 KIAS max.
Flaps ...................................... set, III KIAS max.
Approach speed
75 KIAS or above
Air conditioner ........................................ " OFF
GO-AROUND
Full takeoff power, both engines.
Establish positive climb.
Flaps
retract
Gear ...................................................... UP
Cowl flaps ............................................... adjust
AFTER LANDING
Clear of runway.
Flaps
retract
Cowl flaps
fully OPEN
Carburetor heat ............................................ OFF
Electric fuel pump ....................................... OFF

REPORT: VB-860
4-11
SECTION 4
NORMAL PROCEDURES

PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
SHUTDOWN
Radios ................................................... OFF
Throttle
full aft
Mixture ............ .
idle cut-off
Magnetos. . . . . . . .. .. .
OFF
Master switch .
.
OFF
PARKING
Parking brake ............................................... set
Control wheel
secured with belts
Flaps
full up
Wheel chocks
in place
Tie downs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. secure
REPORT: VB-860
4-12


PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
SECTION 4
NORMAL PROCEDURES
4.7 AMPLIFIED NORMAL PROCEDURES (GENERAL)

The following paragraphs are provided to supply detailed information
and explanations of the normal procedures necessary for the safe operation
of the airplane.
4.9 PREPARATION
The airplane should be given a thorough preflight and walk-around
check. The preflight should include a determination of the airplane's operational status, a check that necessary papers and charts are on board and in
order, and a computation of weight and e.G. limits, takeoff distance and
in-flight performance. Baggage should be weighed, stowed and tied down.
Passengers should be briefed on the use of seat belts and shoulder harnesses,
oxygen, and ventilation controls, advised when smoking is prohibited, and
cautioned against handling or interfering with controls, equipment, door
handles, etc. A weather briefing for the intended flight path should be
obtained, and any other factors relating to a safe flight should be checked
before takeoff.
4.11 PREFLIGHT CHECK
CAUTION
The flap position should be noted before

boarding the airplane. The flaps must be placed
in the "UP" position before they will lock and
support weight on the step.
Upon entering the cockpit. check that the landing gear selector is in the
DOWN position, turn OFF all avionics equipment (to save power and
prevent wear on the units), and turn the master switch ON. Check the
landing gear indicator lights to insure that the three green lights have
illuminated and the red light has not illuminated Chcck the fuel supply.
Adequate fuel should be indicated for the flight plus reserve. The cowl flaps
should be OPEN to facilitate inspection and ensure cooling after engine
start. Return the master switch to OFF to save the battery.
ISSUED: DECEMBER IS, 1978
REPORT: VB860
4128
SECTION 4
NORMAL PROCEDURES

PA44180, SEMINOLE
Check that the ignition switches are OFF and move the mixture controls
to idle cut-off to prevent an inadvertent start while checking the propellers.
Move the trim controls to neutral so that the tabs can be checked for alignment. Extend and retract the flaps to check for proper operation. This check
is performed prior to engine start so that you can hear any noise that might
indicate binding rh~ controls should be free and move properly. Drain the
pitot and static ~yw:m lines through the drains located on the side panel next
to the pilot's seat. Fasten the seat belts on the empty seats. Before leaving the
cockpit, check the emergency exit for security, verifying that the emergency
exit latch is locked and all components are in place.
CAUTION
If the emergency exit is unlatched in flight it
may separate and damage the exterior of the
airplane.
The first item to check during the walk-around is the fuel sumps. Drain
and check for foreign matter. Check the right wing, aileron and flap hinges
and surfaces for damage and ice. Make a close check of the right landing
gear for leaks, proper piston exposure undera static load (2.6 inches) and
that the tires are properly inflated and not excessively worn. The right wing
tip and leading edge should be free from ice and damage.
Open the fuel cap to check the quantity and color of the fuel. Check fuel
quantity with the calibrated dipstick provided for that purpose. For an
accurate reading, the airplane should be on level ground. The cap vent
should be free of obstructions. Secure the fuel cap properly. Check the oil
quantity (four-to six quarts). Six quarts are required for maximum range.
Secure the inspection door. Check the right propeller for nicks or leaks. The
spinner should be secure and undamaged (check closely for cracks). The
cowl flaps should be open and secure.
Check the nose section for damage and the nose landing gear for leaks
and proper strut inflation. Under a normal static load, 2.7 inches of strut
should be exposed Check the tire for wear and proper inflation. If the tow
bar was used. remove and stow. Check the condition of the landing light.
At the front of the airplane, the windshield should be clean, secure and
free from cracks or distortion. Moving around to the left wing, check the
wing, engine nacelle and landing gear as described for the right side. Don't
forget to check the fuel and oil.
REPORT: VB-860
4-12b
ISSUED: DECEMBER 15, 1978


PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
SECTION 4
NORMAL PROCEDURES
If a pitot cover was installed, it should be removed before flight and the
holes checked for obstructions. With the heated pitot switch on, check the
heated pitot head for proper heating. Check the stall warning vanes for
freedom of movement and for damage. A squat switch in the stall warning
system does not allow the units to be activated on the ground.
CAUTION
Care should be taken when an operational

check of the heated pitot head is being
performed. The unit becomes very hot Ground
operation should be limited to 3 minutes
maximum to avoid damaging the heating
elements
Check the dorsal fin air scoop for obstructions. The empennage should
be free of ice and damage and all hinges should be secure. Check the
stabilator for freedom of movement. Antennas should be secure and
undamaged. After turning on the master switch and light switches in the
cockpit, check the navigation and landing lights. Check to make sure the
baggage door is secured and locked.
4.13 BEFORE STARTING ENGINES
Before starting the engines, adjust the seats and fasten the seat belts and
shoulder harnesses.
NOTES
If the fixed shoulder harness (non-inertia reel
type) is installed, it must be connected to the
seat belt and adjusted to allow proper
accessibility to all controls, including fuel
selectors, naps, trim, etc, while maintaining
adequate restraint for the occupant.
If the inertia reel type shoulder ha mess is
installed, a pull test of its locking f(~straint
feature should be performed
Set the parking brake and check to make sure all the circuit breakers are
in and the radios are OFF. Cowl naps should be OPEN and carburetor heat
OFF. The alternators should now be switched ON. Ensure prop sync is in the
MANUAL position.
REPORT: VB-860
413
SECTION ..
NORMAL PROCEDURES

PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
4.15 STARTING ENGINES

The first step in starting is to move the fuel selector to the ON position.
Advance the mixture control to full RICH, open the throttle 1{4 inch and
move the propeller control full FORWARD. Turn the master switch,
electric fuel pump and i~nition switches ON. After ensuring that the propellers are clear. ~)dnw tlle engine if required and engage the starter. Wilen
the engine sta1 Is, adjust the throttle and monitor the oil pressure gauge. If no
oil pressure is mdicated within 30 seconds, shut down the engine and have it
checked. In cold weather it may take somewhat longer for an oil pressure
indication. Repeat the above procedure for the opposite engine. After the
engines have started, check the alternators for sufficient output and the gyro
suction gauge for a reading between 4.8 and 5.2 in. Hg.
NOTES
To prevent starter damage, limit starter cranking to 30-second periods. If the engine does not
start within that time. allow a cooling period of
several minutes before engaging starter again.
Do not engage the starter immediately after
releasing it. This practice may damage the
starter mechanism.
When starting at ambient temperatures +20F
and below, operate first engine started with
alternator ON (at max charging rate not to
exceed 1500 R PM) for 5 minutes minimum before initiating start on second engine.
4.16 STARTING ENGiNES IN COLD WEATHER (BELOW toF)
If available. preheat should be considered. After checking that the

master and magneto switches are OFF, manually rotate each engine through
10 propeller blades during the preflight inspection Read Section 4.21
before starting WIth external power.
REPORT: VB-860
4-14


PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
SECTION 4
NORMAL PROCEDURES
Turn the master switch OFF and connect the external power. Turn the
magneto switches OFF, electric fuel pump ON, move the propeller control
full forward and open the throttle 1/4 inch. Next, prime several strokes then
turn the magnetos ON and engage the starter. It may be necessary to disengage the starter and prime again if the engine does not start. When the
engine fires, pump the primer as required until the engine is running
smoothly. Follow the instructions in Section 4.21 fOl removing the external
power.
4.17 STARTING ENGINES WHEN HOT
If the engines are hot, open the throttle 1/2 inch. Turn ON the master
switch and the electric fuel pump. Advance the mixture control to full RICH
and engage the starter. When the engine starts, adjust the throttle and
monitor the oil pressure gauge.
4.19 STARTING ENGINES WHEN FLOODED

If an engine is flooded, move the mixture control to idle cut-off and
advance the throttle and propeller controls full forward. Turn ON the
master switch and ignition switches. The electric fuel pump should be OFF.
After ensuring that the propeller is ~lear, engage the starter. When the engine
fires, retard the throttle, advance the mixture slowly and check the oil
pressure.
4.21 STARTING ENGINES WITH EXTERNAL POWER

An optional feature called the Piper External Power (PEP) allows the
operator to use an external battery to crank the engines without having to
gain access to the airplane's battery.
Turn the master switch OFF and turn all electrical equipment OFF.
Connect the RED lead of the PEP kit jumper cable to the POSITIVE (+)
terminal of an external 12-volt battery and the BLACK lead to the NEGATIVE (-) terminal. Insert the plug of the jumper cable into the socketlocated
on the fuselage. Note that when the plug is inserted, the electrical system is
ON. Proceed with the normal starting technique.

REPORT: VB-860
4-15
SECTION 4
NORMAL PROCEDURES

PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
. After the engines have started, reduce power on the left engine to the
lowest possible RPM to reduce sparking, and shut down the right engine.
Disconnect the jumper cable from the aircraft. Turn the master switch ON
and check the alternator ammeter for an indication of output. DO NOT
ATIEMPT FLIGHT IF THERE IS NO INDICATION OF ALTERNATOR OUTPUT Check the oil pressure. Restart the right engine after the
external power plug ha~. been removed.
NOTE
For aU normal operations using the PEP
jumper cables, the master switch should be
OFF, but it is possible to use the ship's battery
in parallel by turning the master switch ON.
This will give longer cranking capabilities, but
will not increase the amperage.
CAUTION
Care should be exercised because if the ship's
battery has been depleted, the external power
supply can be reduced to the level of the ship's
battery. This can be tested by turning the
master switch ON momentarily while the
starter is engaged. If cranking speed increases,
the ship's battery is at a higher level than the
external power supply. If the battery has been
depleted by excessive cranking, it must be recharged before the second engine is started. AU
the alternator current will go to the low battery
until it receives sufficient charge, and it may
not start the other engine immediately.
REPORT: VB-1I60
4-16


PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
SECTION 4
NORMAL PROCEDURES
4.23 WARM-UP
Warm-up the engines at 1000 to 1200 RPM. Avoid prolonged idling at
low RPM, as this practice may result in fouled spark plugs.
Takeoff may be made as soon as the ground check is completed,
provided that the throttles may be opened fully without backfiring or
skipping and without a reduction in engine oil pressure.
Do not operate the engines at high RPM when I unning up or taxiing
over ground containing loose stones, gravel or any loose material that may
cause damage to the propeller blades.
4.25 TAXIING
Remove chocks from the wheels and check to make sure the taxi area is
clear. Always apply the throttles slowly.
Before taxiing, the brakes should be checked by moving forward a few
feet, throttling back and applying pressure on the toe pedals. As much as
possible, turns during taxiing should be made using rudder pedal motion
and differential power (more power on the engine on the outside ofthe turn,
less on the inside engine) rather than brakes.
During the taxi, check the instruments (turn indicator. directional gyro,
coordination ball, compass) and the heater and defroster. Check the
operation of the fuel management controls by moving each fuel selector to
CROSS FEED for a short time, while the other selector is in the ON position.
Return the selectors to the ON position.
4.27 BEFORE TAKEOFF - GROUND CHECK
A thorough check should be made before takeoff, using a check list.
Before advancing the throttle to check the magnetos and the propeller
action, be sure that the engine oil temperature is 75 F or above.
During engine run-up, head the airplane into the wind if possible and
set the parking brake. Ensure prop sync is in the MANUAL position.
Advance the mixture and propeller controls forward and the throttle
controls to 1500 RPM. Check the feather position of the propellers by
bringing the controls fully aft and then full forward. Do not allow
more than a 500 RPM drop during the feathering check. Move the throttles
REPORT: VB-860
4-17
SECTION ..
NORMAL PROCEDURES

P A44180, SEMINOLE
to 2000 R PM and exercise the propeller controls to etieck the function (lfthe
governor. Retard control until a 200 to 300 drop in RPM is indicated. This
should be done three times on the first flight of the day. The governor can
be checked by retarding the propeller control until a drop of 100 RPM to
200 RPM appears, then advancing the throttle to get a slight increase in
manifold pressure. rile propeller speed should stay the same when the
throttle is ad"an-:cd, tim': indicating proper function of the governor.
Return the propeller controls to full forward and move the carburetor
heat controls to ON then OFF. Check the magnetos at 2000 RPM. The
normal drop on each magneto is 100 R PM and the maximum drop should
not exceed 175 RPM. The maximum differential drop should not exceed 50
RPM. If the RPM drop or engine roughness is excessive, the engines may
be leaned to peak R PM for a short period. After approximately 10 seconds,
the mixture should be returned to the full rich position and another mag
check performed. The alternator ~>Utput should be approximately equal for
both alternators. A 4.8 to 5.2 in. Hg. indication on the gyro suction gauge
signifies proper operation of the gyro suction system.
Set the throttles between 800 and 1000 RPM, check that the fuel selectors and alternator switches are ON and that all the engine gauges are
within their normal operating ranges (green arc). Press-to-test the annunciator light to make sure they all illuminate. Set the altimeter, attitude indicator and directional gyro. Wind and set the clock. Set the mixtures, check
primers locked and advance the propeller controls in the forward position.
The friction lock should be adjusted. Check to make sure the carburetor heat
is OFF. Adjust the cowl flaps and set the wing flaps and trim (stabilator and
rudder) tabs as required. The seat backs should be erect and seat belts and
harnesses fastened. Fasten the seat belts on the empty seals.
NOTES
'leal bel, and adjusted to allow proper accessibility to all controls, including fuel selectors,
naps, trim, etc., while maintaining adequate
restraint for the occupant.
If the inertia reel type sttoulder harness is
installed, a pull test of its locking restraint
feature should be performed.
REPORT: VB8(iO
418


PA44-180, SEMINOLE
SECTION .NORMAL PROCEDURES
All controls should be free with full travel. and all doors should be sew
curely latched. Ensure that the electric fuel pumps are ON. Pitot heat should
be used as required. Turn OFF the air conditioner to insure maximum
power.
4.29 TAKEOFF
The normally recommended procedure for sea level takeoff is to advance the throttles full forward. During pretakeoffcheck at a high elevation,
lean the mixture to obtain smooth operation. leave the mixture in this position for takeoff. Do not overheat the engine when operating with mixture
leaned. If overheating occurs. enrich the mixture enough that temperature
returns to normal.
Takeoff should not be attempted with ice or frost on the wings. Takeoff
distances and 50-foot obstacle clearance distances are shown on charts in the
Performance Section of this Handbook. The performance shown on charts
will be reduced by uphill gradient, tailwind component. or soft, wet, rough
or grassy surface, or poor pilot technique.
Avoid fast turns onto the runway followed by immediate takeoff,
especially with a low fuel supply. As power is applied at the start of the take
off roll, look at the engine instruments to see that the engines are operating
properly and putting out normal power and at the airspeed indicator to see
that it is functioning. Apply throttle smoothly.
The flap setting for normal takeoff is 0. In certain short field takeoff
efforts when the shortest possible ground roll and the greatest clearance
distance over a 50 ft. obstacle is desired, a flap setting of 25 is recommended.
When obstacle clearance is no problem. a normal flaps up (0) takeoff
may be used. Accelerate to 75 KIAS and ease back on the wheel enough to let
the airplane lift off. After lift-off. accelerate to the best rate of climb speed.
88 KIAS. or higher if desired, retracting the landing gear ~ hen a gear-down
landing is no longer possible on the runway.
When a short field effort is required but the ;o;ituation presents a wide
margin on obstacle clearance. the safest short field technique to use is with
the flaps up (0). In the event of an engine failure. the airplane is in the best
night configuration to sustain altitude immediately after the gear is raised.
Set the stabilator trim indicator in the takeoff range. Set the brakes and
bring the engines to full power before release. Accelerate to 70 KIAS and
ISSUED: MA RCR 23, 1978
REPORT: VB860
419
SECTION 4
NORMAL PROCEDURES

PA-44180, SEMINOLE
rotate the airplane firmly so that the airspeed is approximately 75 ((lAS

when passing through the 50-foot height. The airplane should then be
allowed to accelerate to the best angle of climb speed (82 (( lAS at sea level) if
obstacle clearance is necessary, or best rate of climb speed (88 ((lAS) if
obstacles are not a problem. The landing gear should be retracted when a
gear-down landing is no longer possible on the runway.
When the shortest possible ground roll and the greatest clearance
distance over a SO-foot obstacle is desired, use a 25-degree flap setting (second notch). Set the stabilator trim indicator slightly nose up from the takeoff range. Set the brakes and bring the engines to full power before release.
Accelerate to 63 KIAS and rotate firmly so that when passing through the
SO-foot height the airspeed is approximately 67 KIAS. Retract the gear when
a gear-down landing is no longer possible on the runway. It should also be
noted that when a 2S-degree flap setting is used on the takeoff roll, an effort
to hold the airplane on the runway too long may result in a "wheelbarrowing" tendency. This should be avoided.
The distances required using these takeoff procedures are given on
charts in the Performance Section of this Handbook.
4.31 CLIMB
On climb-out after takeoff, it is recommended that the best angle of
climb speed (82 KlAS) be maintained only if obstacle clearance is a consideration. The best rate of climb speed (88 KIAS) should be maintained
with full power on the engines until adequate terrain clearance is obtained.
At this point, engine power should be reduced to approximately 75% power
for cruise climb. A cruise climb speed of 105 ((lAS or higher is also recommended. This combination of reduced power and increased climb speed
provides better engine cooling, less engine wear, reduced fuel consumption,
lower cabin noise level. and better forward visibility.
When reducing engine power, the throttles should be retarded first,
followed by the propeller controls. The mixture controls should remain at
full rich during the climb Cowl flaps should be adjusted to maintain cylinder
head and oil temperatures within the normal ranges specified for the engine.
Turn the electric fuel pumps off at a safe altitude.
Consistent operational use of cruise climb power settings is strongly
recommended since this practice will make a substantial contribution to fuel
economy and increased engine life, and will reduce the incidence of premature engine overhauls.
REPORT: VB-8(tO
4-10
ISSUED: MARCH 13, 1'73

REVISED: JULY 14, .'81

PA~44-180, SEMINOLE
SECTION 4
NORMAL PROCEDURES
4.33 CRUISING
When leveling off at cruise altitude, the pilot may reduce to a cruise
power setting in accordance with the Power Setting Table in this Handbook.
For maximum service life, cylinder head temperature should be maintained below 435F during high performance cruise operation and below
400F during economy cruise operation. If cylinder head temperatures become too high during flight, reduce them by enriching the mixture, byopening cowl flaps, by reducing power, or by use of any combination of these
methods.
Following level-off for cruise, the cowl flaps should be closed or adjusted as necessary to maintain proper cylinder head temperatures, and the
airplane should be trimmed to fly hands off.
The pilot should monitor weather conditions while flying and should
be alert to conditions which might lead to icing. If induction system icing is
expected, place the carburetor heat control in the "ON" position.
WARNING
Flight in icing conditions is prohibited. If icing
is encountered, immediate action should be
taken to fly out of icing conditions. Icing is
hazardous due to greatly reduced performance,
loss of forward visibility, possible longitudinal
control difficulties due to increased control
sensitivity, and impaired power plant and fuel
system operation.
The ammeters for the electrical system should be monitored during
flight, especially during night or instrument flight, so that corrective
measures can be taken in case of malfunction. The procedures for dealing
with electrical failures are contained in the Emergency Procedure Section
of this Handbook. The sooner a problem is recognized and corrective action
taken, the greater is the chance of avoiding total elect rical failure. Both alternator switches should be ON for normal operation. The two ammeters
continuously indicate the alternator outputs. Certain regulator failures can
REPORT: VB-860
4-21
SECTION 4
NORMAL PROCEDURES

PA-44--180, SEMINOLE
cause the alternator output voltage to increase uncontrollably. To prevent

damage, overvoltage relays are installed to automatically shut off the alternator(s). The alternator light on the annunciator panel will illuminate to
warn of the tripped condition. Alternator outputs will vary with the electrical equipment in use and the state of charge of the battery. Alternator
outputs should not exceed 60 amperes.
.
It is nQt recommended to takeoff into IFR operation with a single alternator. During flight, electrical loads should be limited to SO amperes for
each alternator. Although the alternators are capable of 60 amperes output,
limiting loads to 50 amperes will assure battery charging current.
Since the Seminole has one fuel tank per engine, it is advisable to feed
the engines symmetrically during cruise so that approximately the same
amount of fuel will be left in each side for the landing. A crossfeed is provided and can be used to even up the fuel, if necessary.
During flight, keep account of time and fuel used in connection with
power settings to determine how the fuel flow and fuel quantity gauging
systems are operating.
There are no mechanical uplocks in the landing gear system. In the event
of a hydraulic system malfunction, the landing gear will free-fall to the gear
down position. The true airspeed with gear down is approximately 75% of
the gear retracted airspeed for any given power setting. Allowances for the
reduction in airspeed and range should be made when planning extended
flight between remote airfields or flight over water.
4.35 DESCENT
When power is reduced for descent, the mixtures should be enriched as
altitude decreases. The propellers may be left at cruise setting; however if
the propeller speed is reduced, it should be done after the throttles have been
retarded. Cowl flaps should normally be closed to keep the engines at the
proper operating temperature.
REPORT: VB-860
4-22

PA44180, SEMINOLE
SECTION 4
NORMAL PROCEDURES
4.37 APPROACH AND LANDING

Sometime during the approach for a landing, the throttle controls
should be retarded to check the gear warning horn. Flying the airplane with
the horn inoperative is not advisable. Doing so can lead to a gear up landing
as it is easy to forget the landing gear, especially when approaching for a one
engine inoperative landing, or when other equipment is inoperative, or when
attention is drawn to events outside the cabin. The red landing gear unsafe
light will illuminate when the landing gear is in transition between the full up
position and the down and locked position. Additionally, the light will
illuminate when the gear warning horn sounds. The gear warning horn will
sound at low throttle settings if the gear is not down and locked and when
landing flaps are selected and the gear is not down and locked.
The light is off when the landing gear is in either the full down and
locked or full up positions.
Prior to entering the traffic pattern, the aircraft should be slowed to
approximately 100 KIAS, and this speed should be maintained on the downwind leg. The landing check should be made on the downwind leg. The seat
backs should be erect, and the seat belts and shoulder harnesses should be
fastened.
NOTES
seat belt and adjusted to allow proper accessibility to all controls, including fuel selectors,
flaps, trim, etc., while maintaining adequate
restraint for the occupant
If the inertia reel type shoulder harness is

installed, a pull test of its locking restraint
feature should be perfonned.
Both fuel selectors should nonnally be ON, and the cowl flaps should be
set as required. The electric fuel pumps should be ON. Set the mixture
controls. Select landing gear DOWN and check for three green lights on the
panel and look for the nose wheel in the nose wheel mirror. The landing gear
should be lowered at speeds below 140 KlAS and the flaps at speeds below
111 KIAS.
REPORT: VB860
423
SECTION 4
NORMAL PROCEDURES

PA-44-t80, SEMINOLE
Maintain a traffic pattern speed of 100 KIASand a final approach speed

of 90 KIAS. If the aircraft is lightly loaded, the final approach speed may be
reduced to gO KIAS.
When the power is reduced on close final approach, the prop sync
should be in the MANlfAL position and the propeller controls should be
advanced to (he full tOl ward position to provide maximum power in the
event of a go-around .. he air conditioner should also be turned OFF to
ensure maximum power
The landing gear position should be checked on the downwind leg and
again on final approach by checking the three green indicator lights on the
instrument panel and looking at the external mirror to check that the nose
gear is extended. Remember that when the navigation lights are on, the gear
position lights are dimmed and are difficult to see in the daytime.
Flap position for landing will depend on runway length and surface
wind. Full flaps will reduce stall speed during final approach and will permit
contact with the runway at a slower speed. Good pattern management
includes a smooth, gradual reduction of power on final approach with the
power fully off before the wheels touch the runway. This gives the gear
warning horn a chance to blow if the gear is not locked down. If electric trim
is available, it can be used to assist a smooth back pressure during flare-out.
Maximum braking after touchdown is achieved by retracting the flaps,
applying back pressure to the wheel and applying pressure on the brakes.
However, unless extra braking is needed or unless a strong crosswind or
gusty air condition exists, it is best to wait until turning off the runway to
retract the flaps. This will permit full attention to be given to the landing and
landing roll and will also.prevent the pilot from accidentally reaching for the
gear handle instead of the flap handle.
For a normal landing, approach with full flaps (40) and partial power
until shortly before touchdown. Hold the nose up as long as possible before
and after contacting the ground with the main wheels.
Approach with full flaps at 75 KIAS for a short field landing.
Immediately after toudldown, raise the flaps, apply back pressure to the
wheel and apply brakes.
If a crosswind or high-wind landing is necessary, approach with higher
than normal speed and with zero to 25 degrees of flaps. Immediately after
touchdown, raise the flaps. During a crosswind approach hold a crab angle
into the wind until ready to flare out for the landing. Then lower the wing
that is into the wind to eliminate the crab angle without drifting, and use the
REPORT: VB-860
4-24


PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
SECTION 4
NQRMAl PROCEDURES
rudder to keep the wheels aligned with the runway. Avoid prolonged side
slips with a low fuel indication.
The maximum demonstrated crosswind component for landing is 17
KTS.
4.39 GO-AROUND
If a go-around from a normal approach with the airplane in the landing
configuration becomes necessary, apply takeoff power to both engines.
Establish a positive climb attitude, retract the flaps and landing gear and
adjust the cowl flap for adequate engine cooling.
4.41 AFTER LANDING

After leaving the runway, retract the flaps and open the cowl flaps. Test
the toe brakes, a spongy pedal is often an indication that the brake fluid
needs replenishing. The carburetor heat control should be OFF.
4.43 SHUTDOWN
Turn the electric fuel pumps and all radio and electrical equipment
OFF. Move the throttle controls full aft and the mixture controls to idle
cut-off. Turn OFF the magneto and master switches.
NOTE
The flaps must be placed in the "UP" position
for the flap step to support weight. Passengers
should be cautioned accordingly.
4.45 PARKING
, The airplane can be moved on the ground with the aid of the optional
nose wheel tow bar. Set the parking brake. The ailerons and stabilator
should be secured by looping the scat belt through the control wheel and
pulling it snug. The rudder need not be secured under normal conditions, as
its connection to the nose wheel holds it in position. The flaps are locked
when in the fully retracted position. Tie-down ropes may be attached to
mooring rings under each wing and to the tail skid.
REPORT: VB-860
4-25
SECTION 4
NORMAL PROCEDURES

PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
4.47 TURBULENT AIR OPERATION

In keeping with good operating practice used in all aircraft, it is recommended that when turbulent air is encountered or expected, the airspeed
be reduced to maneuvering speed to reduce the structural loads caused by
gusts and to allow for inadvertent speed build-ups, which may occur as a
result of the turbulence or of distractions caused by the conditions. (See
Subsection 2.:<.1
4.49 VSSE - INTENTIONAL ONE ENGINE INOPERATIVE SPEED
VSSE is a speed selected by the aircraft manufacturer as a training aid
for pilots in the handling of multi-engine aircraft. It is the minimum speed
for intentionally rendering one engine inoperative in flight. This minimum
speed provides the margin the manufacturer recommends for use when
intentionally performing engine inoperative maneuvers during training in
the particular airplane.
The intentional one engine inoperative speed, VSS E, for the PA-44-l80
is 82 KIAS.
4.51 VMCA - AIR MINIMUM CONTROL SPEED
YMCA is the minimum flight speed at which a twin-engine airplane is
directionally controllable as determined in accordance with Federal Aviation Regulations. Airplane certification conditions include one engine becoming inoperative and wind milling; not more than a 5 bank toward the
operative engine; landing gear up; flaps in takeoff position; and most rearward center of gravity.
YMCA for the PA-44-l80 has been determined to be 56 KIAS and is a
stalled condition.
The YMCA demonstration, which may be required for the FAA flight
test for the multi-engine rating, approaches an uncontrolled flight condition
with power reduced on one engine. The demonstration and all intentional
one engine operations should not be performed at an altitude of less than
4000 feet above the ground. The recommended procedure for YMCA
demonstration is to reduce the power to idle on the simulated inoperative
engine at or above the intentional one engine inoperative speed, VSSE, and
slow down approximately one knot per second until the FAA Required
Demonstration Speed, YMCA, or stall warning is obtained.
REPORT: VB-860
4-26


PA-44-J80, SEMINOLE
SECTION 4
NORMAL PROCEDURES
VSSE is a minimum speed selected by the manufacturer for intentionally rendering one engine inoperative in flight for pilot training
VSSE for the PA-44-180 is 82 KIAS
YMCA DEMONSTRATION
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
Landing Gear
UP
Flaps
UP
Airspeed
at or above 82 KIAS (VSSE)
Propeller Controls
HIGH RPM
Throttle (Simulated Inoperative Engine)
IDLE
(f) Throttle (Other Engine)
MAX ALLOWABLE
(g) Airspeed
Reduce approximately I knot
per second until either YMCA or
STALL WARNING is obtained
CAUTIONS
Use rudder to maintain directional control
(heading) and ailerons to maintain 5 bank
towards the operative engine (lateral attitude).
At the first sign of either VMCA or stall warning (which may b~ evidenced by. Inability to
maintain heading or lateral attitude, aerodynamic stall buffet, or stall warning horn)
immediately initiate recovery; reduce power \0
idle on the operative engine, and immediately
lower the nose to regain VSSE.
One engine inoperative stalls are not recommended
Under no circumstances should an attempt be made to fly at a speed
below YMCA with only one engine operating
4.53 STALLS
The loss of altitude during a power off stall with the gear and flaps retracted may be as much as 300 feet.
The stall warning system is inoperative with the master switch OFF.

REPORT: VB-860
4-27
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 5
PERFORMANCE
Paragraph
No.
Page
No.
5.1
5-1
5-1
5-3
5-9
5-9
5.3
55
5.7
General ........................................
Introduction - Performance and Flight Planning
.
Flight Planning Example
.
Performance Graphs ..........................
List of Figures
.
REPORT: VB860
5-i

PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
SECTION 5
PERFORMANCE
SECTION 5
PERFORMANCE
5.J GENERAL
All of the required (FAA regulations) and complementary performance

information applicable to this aircraft is provided by this section.
Performance information associated with those optional systems and
equipment which require handbook supplements is provided by Section 9
(Supplements).
All data given is for both two and three blade propellers unless otherwise noted.
5.3 INTRODUCTION - PERFORMANCE AND FLIGHT PLANNING
The performance information presented in this section is based on
measured Flight Test Data corrected to I.C.A.O. standard day conditions
and analytically expanded for the various parameters of weight, altitude,
temperature, etc.
The performance charts are unfactored and do not make any allowance
for varying degrees of pilot proficiency or mechanical deterioration of the
aircraft. This performance, however, can be duplicated by following the
stated procedures in a properly maintained airplane.
Effects of conditions not considered on the charts must be evaluated by
the pilot, such as the effect of soft or grass runway surface on takeoff and
landing performance, or the effect of winds aloft on cruise and range
performance. Endurance can be grossly affected ov improper leaning
procedures, and inflight fuel flow and quantity checks are recommended.
REMEMBER! To get chart performance, follow the chart procedures.

REPORT: VB-860
5-1
SECTION 5
PERFORMANCE

PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
The information provided by paragraph 5.5 (Flight Planhing Example)

outlines a detailed flight plan using the performance charts in this section.
Each chart includes its own example to show how it is used.
WARNING
Performance information derived by extrapolation beyond the limits shown on the charts
should n(lt be used for flight planning
purposes.
REPORT: VB-860
5-2

REVISED: SEPTEMBER 14,1979

PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
SECTION 5
PERFORMANCE
5.5 FLIGHT PLANNING EXAMPLE

(a) Aircraft Loading
The first step in planning a flight is to calculate the airplane
weight and center of gravity by utilizing the information provided
by Section 6 (Weight and Balance) of this handbook.
The basic empty weight for the airplane as delivered from the
factory has been centered in Figure 6-5. If any alterations to the
airplane have been made affecting weight and balance, reference to
the aircraft logbook and Weight and Balance Record (Figure 6-7)
should be made to determine the current basic empty weight of the
airplane.
Make use of the Weight and Balance loading Form (Figure
6-11) and the e.G. Range and Weight graph (Figure 6-15) to determine the total weight of the airplane and the center of gravity
position.
After proper utilization of the information provided, the
following weights have been found for consideration in the flight
planning example.
The landing weight cannot be determined until the weight of the
fuel to be used has been established [refer to item (g)( In.
(I) Basic Empty Weight
25831bs.
(2) Occupants (2 x 170 Ibs.)
340 Ibs.
(3) Baggage and Cargo
27 Ibs.
(4) Fuel (6 Ib./ gal. x 80)
480 Ibs.
(5) Takeoff Weight (3800 lb. max. allowable)
3430 Ibs.
(6) landing Weight
(a)(5) minus (g)(I), (3430 Ibs. minus 311.4Ibs.) 31191bs.
Takeoff and landing weights are below the maximums, and
the weight and balance calculations have determined the e.G.
position within the approved limits.
(b) Takeoff and landing
Now that the aircraft loading has been determined, all aspects
of the takeoff and landing must be considered.

REPORT: VB-860
5-3
SECTION 5
PERFORMANCE

PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
All of the existing conditions at the departure and destination

airport must be acquired. evaluated and maintained throughout the
flight.
Apply the departure airport conditions and takeoff weight to
the applopriate Takeoff Performance and Accelerate and Stop
Distance graphs (Figures 5-5 thru 5-19) to determine the length of
runway necessary for the takeoff and/ or the barrier distance.
The landing distance calculations are performed in the same
manner using the existing conditions at the destination airport and.
when established. the landing weight.
The conditions and calculations for the example flight are
listed below. The takeoff and landing distances required for the
example flight have fallen well below the available runway lengths.
Departure
Airport
(I) Ptessure Altitude
(2) Temperature
(3) Wind Component
(4) Runway Length Available

(5) Runway Required (Normal
Procedure. Std. Brakes)
Takeoff
Accelerate and Stop
Landing
Destination
Airport
680 ft.
680 ft.
goC
8C
6 KTS
5 KTS
(Headwind) (Headwind)
9000 f1.
7400 ft.
1750 ft.*
2050 ft.**
1200***
NOTE
The remainder of the performance charts used
in this flight plan example assume a no wind
conJition. The effect of winds aloft must be
considet ed by the pilot when computing climb.
cruise and descent performance.
*reference Figure 5-11

**reference Figure 5-5
***reference Figure 5-45
REPORT: VB-860
5-4


PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
SECTION S
PERFORMANCE
(c) Climb
The next step in the flight plan is to determine the necessary
climb segment components.
The desired cruise pressure altitude and COl responding cruise
outside air temperature values are the filst variables to be
considered in determining the climb components from the Fuel,
Time and Distance to Climb graph (Figure 5-27). After the fuel,
time and distance for the cruise pressure altitude and outside air
temperature values have been established, apply the existing
conditions at the departure field to graph (Figure 5-27). Now,
subtract the values obtained from the graph for the field of
departure conditions from those for the cruise pressure altitude.
The remaining values are the true fuel, time and distance
components for the climb segment of the flight plan corrected for
field pressure altitude and temperature.
The following values were determined from the above
instructions in the flight planning example.
(I) Cruise Pressure Altitude
5500 ft.
(2) Cruise OAT
2C
(3) Time to Climb (45 min. minus 1.2 min.)
3.3 min.'"
(4) Distance to Climb (7 naut. miles
minus 1.4 naut. miles)
5.6 naut. miles'"
(5) Fuel to Climb (2.5 gal. minus 1.0 gal.)
1.5 gal. '"
(d) Descent
The descent data will be determined prior to the cruise data to
provide the descent distance for establishing the total cruise
distance.
Utilizing the cruise pressure altitude and OAT determine the
basic fuel, time and distance for descent (Figure 541) These figures
must be adjusted for the field pressure altitude and temperature at
the destination airport. To find the necelisalV adjustment values,
use the existing pressure altitude and temperature conditions at the
destination airport as variables to find the fuel, time and distance
"'reference Figure 5-27

ISSUED: MARCH 23,1978
REPORT: VB860
5-5
SECTION 5
PERFORMANCE

PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
values from the graph (Figure 5-41). Now, subtract the values
obtained from the field conditions from the values obtained from
the cruise conditions to find the true fuel, time and distance values
needed for the night plan.
The values obtained by proper utilization of the graphs for the
descent segmt:n i. of the example are shown below.
(I) Time to Descend
(9 min. minus 2 min.)
7 min. '"
(2) Distance to Descend
(30 naut. miles minus
26 naut. miles*
4 naut. miles)
(3) Fuel to Descend
(3 gal. minus I gal.)
2 gal. '"
(e) Cruise
Using the total distance to be traveled during the night, subtract
the previously calculated distance to climb and distance to descend
to establish the total cruise distance. Refer to the appropriate
Lycoming Operator's Manual and the Power Setting Tables when
selecting the cruise power setting. The established pressure altitude
and temperature values and the selected cruise power should now be
utilized to determine the true airspeed from the Speed Power graph
(Figure 5-31).
Calculate the cruise fuel for the cruise power setting from the
information provided on Figure 5-31.
The cruise time is found by dividing the cruise distance by the
cruise speed and the cruise fuel is found by multiplying the cruise
fuel flow by the cruise time.
The cruise calculations established for the cruise segment of
the night planning example are as follows:
(I) Totai Distance
394 miles
(2) Cruise Distance
(e)( I) minus (c)(4) minus (d)(2),
(394 naut. miles minus 5.6 naut.
miles minus 26 naut. miles)
362.4 naut. miles
"'reference Figure 5-41

REPORT: VB-860
5-6


PA-44-UJO, SEMINOLE
SECTION 5
PERFORMANCE
(3) Cruise Power (Best Power

Mixture)
55% rated power
(4) Cruise Speed
138 KTS TAS'"
(5) Cruise Fuel Consumption
18.6 GPH'"
(6) Cruise Time
(e)(2) divided by (e)(4), (362.4 naut.
2.6 hrs.
miles divided by 138 KTS)
(7) Cruise Fuel
(e)(5) multiplied by (e)(6), (18.6
48.4 gal.
GPH multiplied by 2.6 hrs.)
(0 Total Flight Time

The total flight time is determined by adding the time to climb,
the time to descend and the cruise time. Remember! The time values
taken from the climb and descent graphs are in minutes and must be
converted to hours before adding them to the cruise time.
The following flight time is required for the flight planning
example.
(I) Total Flight Time
(c)(3) plus (d)(I) plus (e)(6),
(0.06 hrs. plus .12 hrs. plus 2.6 hrs.)
2.78 hrs.
(g) Total Fuel Required
Determine the total fuel required by adding the fuel to climb,
the fuel to descend and the cruise fuel. When the total fuel (in
gallons) is determined, multiply this value by 61 b. / gal. to determine
the total fuel weight used for the flight.
The total fuel calculations for the example flight plan are
shown below.
(I) Total Fuel Required
(c)(5) plus (d)(3) plus (e)(7),
(1.5 gal. plus 2.0 gal. plus 48.4 gal.)
51.9 gal.
311.41bs.
(51.9 gal. multiplied by 6Ib./gal.)
*reference Figure 5-31

REPORT: VB860
S7
SECTION 5
PERFORMANCE

PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
REPORT: VB-80
5-8

PA44180, SEMINOLE
SECTION 5
PERFORMANCE
5.7 PERFORMANCE GRAPHS

LIST OF FIGURES
Figure
No.
5-1
5-3
5-5
5-7
5-9
5-11
5-13
5-15
5-17
5-19
5-21
5-23
5-25
5-27
5-29
5-31
5-33
5-35
5-37
5-39
5-41
5-43
5-45
Page
No.
Airspeed Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stall Speed Vs. Angle of Bank......................
Normal Procedure - Accelerate and Stop Distance. . . .
Short Field Accelerate and Stop Distance. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Normal Procedure Takeoff Ground Roll (0 Flaps) ....
Normal Procedure Takeoff Distance Over 50 Ft.
. Barrier (0 Flaps)................................
Short Field Effort Takeoff Ground Roll (0 Flaps).....
Short Field Effort Takeoff Distance Over 50 Ft.
Barrier (0 Flaps)................................
Short Field Effort Takeoff Ground Roll (25 Flaps)... .
Short Field Effort Takeoff Distance Over 50 Ft.
Barrier (25 Flaps).... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Climb Performance - Both Engines Operating - Gear
Down..........................................
Climb Performance - Both Engines Operating Gear Up. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Climb Performance - One Engine Operating Gear Up. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel, Time and Distance to Climb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Setting Table ..............................
Speed Power......................................
Standard Temperature Performance Cruise Range .....
Standard Temperature Economy Cruise Range .......
Performance Cruise Endurance. . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Economy Cruise Endurance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel, Time and Distance to Descend .... . . . . . . . . . . . .
Landing Ground Roll .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Landing Distance Over 50 Ft. Barrier ... . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-11
5-12
5-13
5-14
5-15
5-16
5-17
5-18
5-19
5-20
5-21
5-22
5-23
5-24
525
5-26
5-27
5-28
5-29
530
5-31
5-32
5-33
REPORT: VB860
59
SECTION 5
PERFORMANCE

PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
THIS PAGE INTENTION ALLY LEFT BLANK
REPORT: VB860
510
PIPER AIRCRAFT CORPO~ATION

PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
SECTION S
PERFORMANCE
PA-44-180
'AIRSPEED CALiBRATION
3800 POUNDS
I~-
I i III
ijjiMllt.
-I! .1, ";II
. 'I jl
200
(:
il
I
i-i- t
I
160
1&1
~ 140
Ul
C
1&112 0
!(
it
11+
'_~rnmJT
"! II
~~+
II:
IlII
i
,H
'
"H'It
--
T,
11
I-
' -
1'
~
-
!i
I t
!1'
''ll"4 W i
11
1
I
_'f ~t } I
.L' i
I'
ii l
il
. t- ~'"
II
!I
jll
I
I
tf"1
}ik
~ ~
(c~rt
11
IIl-t
I
,llf~'
l>r'h el
I
0100
, ,
. "lHth'
Ci
60
,IU
i"J-~!l1'd::
T.. , :1 Ii,
Ii.
~
II:
80
i ~illtl
180
l!!0
lj'.
- Ii!
~! I" 11ill': !
--
'-I
-T
~Il II
I;
11II l! :
t-r
,
II
--
40
!
80
80
100
120
140
160
I
1 .:J -
180
I!
200
INDICATED AIRSPEED - KNOTS

EKample:
Indicated airspeed: 124 knots
Flaps up
Calibrated airspeed: 123 knots
AIRSPEED CALIBRATION
Figure 5-1
REPORT: VB-860
5-11
PIPER AIRCR,AFT CORPORATION

PA-44-tIO. SEMINOLE
SECTION 5
PERFORMANCE
1\'1)1 - 033dl 1W.LS
Ii
"
. -1.1:l
t+i~
"
I' 8'008 I liNn ':IllY
STALL SPEED VS. ANGLE OF BANK

Figure 5-3
REPORT: VB-I60
5-11
00
00
e~
>
:=
>
r"
NORMAL PROCEDURE - ACCELERATE

AND STOP DISTANCE
.
:=
o
-...,
I:'
\0
QO
IU
::;
['.I!j
-..,
00
>
Z
til
QO
("j
-~
\<ole
f'I';l
rflO
.~J
'"
.>'.,"
'1.,."1:
IU
"g;;
IU
"I:l
o
~~.;,~
-.9~,
4000
ili
3000
-40
30
20
! "
10
! I I
2000 ~
Q
.
..,....
Example:
Alrpon pressure altitude: 680 ft.
Outside air temperature: SC
WeIght. 3430 lbs.
Wind component: 5 kt. headwind
Accel. & stop dist.. 2050 ft.
i
I
w
u
sTD:TEMP".
I! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! I! ! ! !
o
2
.
lu
IU
'i>~t-..\oy,~
>
:z
"I:l
or"n
~'
:z
IU
""'~\o'
.>.,
'Z
~'
~:=
-"!l
::;
Ul~
:=
~>
Z..,
I I
,U
~.
:;~
~
o
oon
IU
nr"
:=
:;
<
i!!
:=
rfl:=
BOTH ENGINES 2700 RPM

AND FULL THR01TlE
MIXTURE FUll RICH
WING FLAPS O
MAX. BRAKING
COWL FLAPS OPEN
PAVED LEVEL DRY RUNWAY
ABORT SPEED 75 KIAS
...
=
:=
"Tl>
_.n
t-",
;>
e_
~~rrP.~,QAR"" ~,t;I~,K~S ~
NOTE
REDUCE ACCEl. 80 STOP DIST.
BY 10% IF HEAVY DUTY
BRAKES ARE INSTALLED.
OQ("j
~
~
>."I:l
Arfl
PA-44-180
:::
"I:l~
o
:=
:-~
"e
1000
rfl
:=
"!l
000
:=~
! I II ! ! ! I I ! I ! I ! I I!
10
20
TEMPERATURE - C
30
~("j
II
40
3500
3000
2500
WEIGHT - POUNDS
10
15
WIND COMPONENT - KNOTS
>::!
2 0
Z
nrfltll
..,
U1I'"
':"l:S'J
0
'"
-<
==
clo
c:r..
<=
.,00
::I:
'"
l:S'J
f"'"
>
I'":l
I'":l
l:S'J
"T]f"'"
_.~
~:~.8C
l:S'J
::;
>
'"
I'":l
::I:
N
~
\00
-.l
Clll
>U1I
~ P::
!"')
~-lit
__ ~4+-4
.:::;t.
_~
.:~'
;..~
5ooot;
....III
fl~
~.
~ ~~
ti
0
m
...
'!'..o
-.I>
~
S
3000 Go
2
0
at,
?,W--i'1.
~
......'I:o~
",i,r>
!f~40
III
4000U
~
III
III
'('l:S'J
rIJ
0-
",0
::;2
MIXTURE FULL RICH

WING FLAPS 0 ABORT SPEED 70 KIAS OR
O'!OTE d' by10~
WING FLAPS 25 ABORT SPEED 63 KIAS
Red UCUCCIlI.... S'Op m.
'"
COWL FLAPS OPEN
\!.!!!!'YVdul:ybrakllu...nmllecl:~.
,
~'!1'!1'
MAXIMUM BRAKIN
!:;>
0..,
tI.l
"'!"')
~~
SHORT FIELD ACCELERATE AND

STOP DISTANCE
*STANDARD BRAKES
I-.- ff BOTH ENGINES 2700 RPM a. FULL THROlTLE
Example:
Airport press
alt.:6~Oft.
Outside aIr te
Weight: 3430
Windcomponant: 5 kts. headwmd
Accelerate &. stop, distance: 1750 ft.
1;-:::'-'
OQ",
l:S'J~
PA-44-180
tI.l
C
Z
4
2000
III
rIJ
III
.,
STD. TEMP
"
III
III
,'u
.111
~
a:
"
...
III
tI.l
~
1OOO~
,~
>
2
t"':l
:;
l:S'J
'"
III
15
...
...
_
.,
>
;;
!"')
.,::cl
.~
:t~
.:..!"')
110 0
';:>",
00.,
::'"
->
l'J'10
-40
-30
-20
-10
10
20
TEMPERATURE - C
30
40
3500
3000
2500
WEIGHT - POUNDS
10
15
Z~
0f""'O
l,'!i!lZ
SECTION 5
PERFORMANCE
PA~44.180, SEMINOLE
133:1 - 30N'lfJ.Sla 110Y aNnOY>
.,..
UI
II-
",II)
... 1Q
iIL'1f~. .
-- --
'.(
(ONIM ount liN 11
::1
",0
~f , :~
:flJ
~lIli
... :lII:
YrljI
0-ti H_
0
oZ
-fH
H:~
-'Sf
--
I-.;..
II
-:!
-' i I ,.1
I
'" 0
Nil)
:;)
2
PI
!i:~
gUi
=~
--
~Q
--
"<I
~)~
- ~4i -
,i'l.
~,.
~-
- "41;- f
OJI~~
-~
...
-it!"
~tt
m~~t~~- . ~
~
&ft .. tON
"" ... '"
--
l!l~ .. ~
~ -~ -;p
Ny
IX:
o~
C(
IX:
't"
88 88
G-
:l:
oW
l\
~I-
-1-
~.
ff
"f
NORMAL PROCEDURE TAKEOFF GROUND ROLL (0 FLAPS)

Figure 59
REPORT: VB860
51S
tII:a:I
':"I:!!J
O'-oe
Q
:a:I
='
-<
=
I
ClO
~CIJ
"::=
>
l':""
oe
lie
Q
r':l
I:!!J
NORMAL PROCEDURE
TAKEOFF DISTANCE OVER 50 FT. BARRIER
2700 RPM 8t FULL THROTTLE BEFORE BRAKE RELEASE

'J::t:tu
WEIGHT LIFT OFF
BARRIER
WING FLAPS O
.Iiil. rlt::'
POUNDS SPEED KIAS SPEED KIAS
pAVED leyEL DRY R~NW"Y
,
~
3800
75
88
j-.... +~ d ..
....:p:.1 '.:::
3400
71
83
CAUTION
;: ~'~"-r-r- :':-tt+,-
'F=I+l=t
'1000
88
78
2800
62
73
>e
:a:I~
"t'l:::~
liQ"1:!!J >
-~
~Q~
. ,~
t'
r':l
::=
>
:a:I
r':l
::c
N
~
~
~.,,,,
-.I
ClO
'
J __ ,..., _
'-mr-ri::-V~;"g-i'~'*"a,Tmm'
-.._. tffmC
i0
~~
'iI~~~'
,fi:e
~.
4000~
Ul~~
J~~i4""to
"'~
III
!:!
~~W~IVD
III
:Ii
?,.'3"~"
..'{r,'iI'ii
+-~~
:::;
Ii
3000 0
ID
lli
II:
ffi
II: C.L'
2000 III
(.)
,
'.;..
,~j
I:!!J
Iii
''':0'
-<
I:!!J
Example:
.' , " . ,. , , ...
A,rport press. alt: 6S0 ft.
:a:I
OutsIde a'r temp.. SC
til
<:>
;:i
,,;.0
>
2
!;'
climb I_thIIn60
FPM if T.O. wt. i. ,n
- _ _ the ehaded ---
II:
~J~
I:!!J
oper.tive rate of
'
I:!!J
__
,r,.,..-- "--I :,::':'::::::::
~
I -i..
" .:;':liIH11:IIUilL
.:._~
_
~
~
- t __ -t-'-o Best one engIne 'n--'-;-
" ~'}f~:'t~~!-tl~""J>j,.jf9-:t1I~f-J-!j>"'fPI+1HII+It11'!tIT'Pi+1HI
~:a:I~
n-I:!!J
Vl~.Q
CIJ
CIJ
r':l
;t+.r:;::;:.rJ:t::
=0
~C
oeCIJCIJ
I:!!JI:!!J
:::en
"l'l";
Q:::eO
::=2
> til
PA-44..180
-40
20
is
...
1000 u..
WinifcicimpoOfint:5 'kt: headwInd

We,ght 3430 Ibs.
Total distance over 50 ft. bamer: 1750 ft.
~
20
OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE - C
t'
40
3500
3000
2500
WEIGHT - POUNDS
10
15
WIND- KNOTS
-:e
oe
oe
I:!!J
->
:a:I
r':l
"'Cl:=
~>
."l'l
t~
':"r':l
QOQ
.::":::e
ClJoe
I:!!JO
::=:e
->
2..;
Ql':""Q
1:!!J2
-c::
I II
III
:::c
l'!!l
o
~
...,
::
"l'j
!;'
>
n
:::c
~
I ,Q
~
ClIO
"'>="'=
."'=
&.l'!!l
III
t"::c
;>
=::c
g;n
l'!!l
::~
f""
->
2"'fj
l'!!l
"l'j
"'fj
0'"
f""n
LIFT OFF
..,..,
::c
-:-1...
70
66
62
"Tl>
58
liQ'~
s::l'!!l
riO
~.;100~~
~1~,~
"'::;po
:t:t:tl:h:"":-1~\,)O~
U\"'fj
~"'fj
''
II
[\R.~,::
i~
2
C
~
'
.......
='
"'fj
<
y,f
QO
-llJ'I
~=
. "",,'i:!::::--,
.
<) - '
';1
,,'t-;,
2500
2000
.....
f""
--
w
I
..
52
S
Ill:
-B. .
.:-:~:':_
~---= -=_._=-
.-~:. -'--..?'-
:".::--
~.::.
~_.
1500 C
Z
:;)
--.--
..
;;, 1000 Ill:

C1
u.
500 u.
---r-r-
o
.+=:.::::l:t,.~.;
>
"'=
III
.">.,
ti
u.
f""
~
~
"T'
of""
-IO"IO\. '
o
c::
::c
"
:lOOO
slOP'' ' ,
,.Y'"",'C.':'
::c
"'=
o
~~
~~~
~~
l'!!l
l'!!l0
::c
PEED KIAS
!r'
lIl:
-=
l'!!l
"o
"'fj
III
::cl'!!l
-40
20
20
40
OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE _ C
3500
3000
2500
WEIGHT - POUNDS
10
15
WIND - KNOTS
::n
>::2
20
n2
l'!!ly,
SECTION 5
PERFORMANCE

PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
SHORT FIELD EFFORT TAKEOFF DISTANCE OVER 50 FT.

BARRIER (0 FLAPS)
Figure 5-1:>
REPORT: VB-860
5-18
00
00
::
"::l
00
3:
>-
t'!!J
e-
"::
f!!!l
"!'l
Ex.:=~
press. alt.: 680 ft.
OutsIde air temp.. SoC
3800
3000
2800
63
66
3400
60
&2
"!'l>_. :PI:
. ;;;:,'Qt..
~t'!!J
4,.~"
... 0
, ,.t..Y..
n"!'l
VI,,!,!
-c:"l
-!"o
"
o
"<
t'!!J
"'C
'f'~
-@\
~o
6.t'!!J
."
0_
...
._.
h--
3:>-"!'!
;~
.~.
'J.~L"''''
~ t.~
-1
III
Z
::I
1400
"IOit'INo
"'C
--
"'C
asz
1000 ~
Q
800
.~
~
II.
.~
600
fI$
.\
~
III
"'C
400~
t'!!J
lliC
200
~
"!'!
00
"
">
o
1200 ~
HE,
llia:
.N
>-
t'!!JO
~11111'600 m::1
e""
e""
Z~
oe-~
m~rrnttttttrl 1800
...
II
t1)~
t'!!J"
2000
~~
2:
"
,.~~'b~
~.
o
oe-
-,.."ClO>-
TAKEOFF GROUND ROll
"
PA -44-1 80
::
Wind component 6 Itt. headwind WeIght: 3430 Ibs.
Total ground roll: 660ft.
tiffiffiEtl=i:j:j:ll:~2700 RPM" FULL THROTTLE BEFORE BRAKE RELEASE
P
WING FLAPS - 26 COWL FLAPS OPEN
WEIGHT LIFT OFF
POUNDS SPEED KIAS
"!'!
"'C"'C
>-,"'C
"
"!'l
000
"t'!!J
-40
20
0
20
OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE -
40
3&00
3000
2600
WEIGHT - POUNDS
10
1&
WIND - KNOTS
::~
>-:3
ZO
~Z
t'!!Jua
SECTION 5
PERFORMANCE

PA44180, SEMINOLE
.133: - H3IHH'lf8 'li 09 H3/\O 3:>N'If.1SIO :I:103)1'1f.1
SHORT FIEtD EFFORT TAKEOFF DISTANCE OVER 50 FT.

BARRIER (250 FLAPS)
Figure 5-19
REPORT: VB860
520

PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
SECTION 5
PERFORMANCE
gw
",'"
-i
i
"glu
NW
_IL
cU
0)"
I
CUI
Nil:
~
C~
"II:
UI
all.
:I:
O~
-II:
':(
Ow
'l'0
~i1!
,~
CLIMB PERFORMANCE - BOTH ENGINES OPERATING GEAR DOWN

Figure 5-21
REPORT: VB-860
5-21
PA-44-180
uq.,
N~
N~
Iii
"=<'
Example:
Press. alt.. 680 ft.
Outside air temp.. SC
.,
Weight: 3430 Ibs.
~......-.
Rate of climb: 1570 ft.l min.
=
~
~
~
"
:":
>
."
'"
E;>=
OCll
~
O~
~s:t
~::
::>
Y'~~
tj~=
'00'00
~~
QIllQlll
~
~
.....~
~\~\~~'!'}.'!'\'!'
~
~
t'2'J
";6>
FULL RICH
o~
"',
--
.~~~~~~~
CIl
>Ul
'~~~~~t\~1
_N
!-"~
::Z
~
'Il>'
">
:::2
0-
,,0
,:0'
:2
="
,,=
~~
BEST POWER MIXTURE LEANED 2soF

RICH OF PEAK E.G,T.
~~
n"O
~CIl
0'
:n~~
(JQ
..
2700 RPM & FULL THR~~Iffft.f#

, , , BOTH ENGINES .--'--....'
COWL FLAPS OPEN WING FLAPS 0
MIXTURE FULL RICH ABOVE 75%R
POWER & BEST POWER MIXTURE
BELOW 75% POWER :::+
88 KIAS --.J
_~_~...
C Il-
'(l'"":;C'i.'l'MB'P'ERFORMANCE
, BOTH ENGINES
'':Ii
OPERATING - GEAR UP
:2
"~
ii
~CIl
~~
,,~
.,,~
- 40
-30
~~.;~.
-20
10
''''~
0
liJ
il~II~I!AI~
'~,
'!'
$~
,f':
f':
-="."
~ ~ ~ ~
t~
'!' i!' .
.:..~
000
~q::/,
tto
~=
,~
00-=
$'
~O
:~",!,,-'
::=
->
Z~
20
30
40
400
BOO
1200
1600
RATE OF CLIMB - FEET/MINUTE
2000
0-
e"'0
[!I!JZ
,,I.!J!'r:IJ
~~
r:lJl.!J!'
I.!J!'O
0"
"3:
>>>
,,("'}
~"
f=::c
.Ow.
-N
--
1010
ClID...,
-ClID
PA-44-180
-=
("'}
!:""
3:
...
I.!J!'
"
"3:
.
-.;
IoJ!
.~
~
'""'.
CLIMB
PERFORMANCE
ONE ENGINE
OPERATING
-GEAR UP
.'
2700 RPM
FULl. THROTTLE
COWL FLAP
OPEN
(OPERATING ENGINE)
COWL FLAP
CLOSEO
(INOPERATIVE ENGINE)
FULl. RICH
MIXTURE
AIOVE 71" POWER
MIXTURE
lEST
POWER IELOW
71" POWER
PROP FEATHERED ON
INOPERATIVE ENGINE
88 KIAS
0" FLAPS
3' !lANK TOWARD
OPERATIVE ENGINE
'Sl
("'}
I.!J!'
'0'
"TJO
_Z
~I.!J!'
ril.!J!'
uoz
~s:a
UOz
"
1!.
I.!J!'
"
:;
"-<
I.!J!'
~
"-
,--'
'fl.
NO.
wO
Z
c:':l
"'~
I.!J!'
>-
-40
~"
=>
0_
"
..
r:IJ("'}
I.!J!'"
3:
-1oJ!
z~
!:""("'}
l'J!SO
"
.-"
~
.~
0
.z
."
l'J!S
"e=:
Example:
Press. alt.. 6S0 ft.
Outside air temp.. SoC
Weight: 3430 lbs.
Rate of climb: 340 ft.lmln.
'-~
c:':l
."
.~
"'I.!J!'
~.
~
I.!J!'
;::i
-30
20
10
"
IoJ!
.~
Or:IJ
"I.!J!'
3:("'}
:::1
20
30
40
200
200
400
RATE OF CLIMB - FEET/MINUTE
800
2 0
("'}Z
tsIJ It
PA-44-180
I.I'lID
wlIS
.,.
~~
FUEl, TIME AND DISTANCE TO CLIMB
lIDn
"S!!:::!
BOtH ENGINES 2700 RPM" FULL THROTTLE WING FLAPS O' - COWL FLAPS OPEN
LANDING GEAR RETFIACTED CLIMB SPEED 88 KIAS
NO WIND
lID
..
-I
<
CQ
lIDZ
al: UI
z>
~-'~I
i ~
,...,1Ii.
'IL
lIS
-~
.~,
~.
&l
'$"
'(J~' '
:.
~!,
.-....
:Q~
>
l~
:!
Sic
n_
'"
lIS
:5
CIJ_
lISCIJ
CCIJ
..
CIJ
.-1
~>
VlI
ClJlIS
..
lISC
~
lISi:
i:>
Ill:
~:~f,'
~'
:f\.'
&l
.,,'QI!1.
e5
Example:
Airport press. alt.. 680 ft.
Airport outSide elr temp.. 8C
Cruise press. alt.: 5500 ft.
Cruise outBlde air temp.: -2"C
Fuel to climb: 2.5 minus 1.0 1.5 gal.
Time to climb: 4.5 minus 1.2 3.3 min.
Distance to climb: 7 minus 1.4 5.6 NM
~I
",00'
f!S
=
=
=
""'i
lISn
"
~ooo
--
.........
~
-40
20
",lID
J.."S!!
,..-1
.... n
Ji
~~
->
2::3
al:lID
-w
Ji"J'0.
~
lID
n
20
OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE - "C
40
10
20
30
40
TIME DISTANCE AND FUEL TO CLIMB
go
!)1'12:
:=rlI!lel)
"e"e
FVEL AND POWER CHART - LYCOMING (L) 0-366-E SERIES (PER ENGINE)
>."e
<eI)
_t:::
el)rlI!l
rlI!lO
Press. Std. Alt.

99 BHP - 55% Rated Power
Press.
Alt.
Temp. Approx. Fuel Aow-9.3 Gal/ Hr.- Approx. Fuel Aow-IO.3 Gal/Hr.' ~pprox. Fuel Flow-I 1.2 Gal/ Hr.- Alt.
Feet
e
RPM AND MAN. PRESS.
RPM AND MAN. PRESS.
RPM AND MAN. PRESS.
Feet
2100
2200
2400
2300
2100
2200
2300
2400
2200
2300
2400
0"
"3:
eI
~:=
~~
rlI!l:::
3:w
CllIH
rlI!l.
:=::0
"e
rlI!l
:=
_-.I
!,"fIO
\oC
-.I
\0
:!lei)
OQrlI!l
C~
ri~
y,-
'2
~c:':I
~
>
Cll
~
rlI!l
:=
rlI!l
"e
SL
15
13
II
9
22.2
21.9
21.6
21.3
21.7
21.4
21.1
20.8
21.2
21.0
20.7
20.4
20.7
20.4
20.2
19.9
24.5
24.2
23.9
23.6
24.0
23.7
23.4
23.1
23.4
23.1
22.9
22.6
22.9
22.6
22.3
22.1
26.4
26.1
25.8
25.4
25.8
25.5
25.2
24.9
25.2
24.9
24.6
24.4
4000
5000
6000
7000
7
5
3
20.6
20.3
20.2
19.7
20.1
19.9
19.6
19.3
19.7
19.4
19.2
18.9
23.2
22.9
22.6
22.7
22.4
22.1
21.8
22.3
22.0
21.7
21.5
21.8
21.5
21.3
21.0
FT
24.7
FT
24.1
23.8
21.0
20.8
20.5
20.2
8000
9000
10,000
11,000
-I
-3
-5
19.9
19.6
19.3
18.6
18.4
18.1
17.9
21.2
FT
20.7
20.5
FT
FT
19.1
18.8
18.5
18.3
FT
-7
19.5
19.2
18.9
18.6
FT
18.0
FT
17.6
17.4
FT
1000
2000
3000
12.000
13.000
14,000
-9
11
-13
FT
FT
SL
y.:
0'\
Ute
=>
e :=
eI)~
rlI!l:=
3:>
2~
o
-""
t"'~
1000
2000
3000
rlI!lO
:=
4000
5000
6000
7000
:=
"e
>
~
S
2
8000
9000
10,000
11.000
12.000
13,000
4,000
"e
rlI!l
:=
""
Oel)
:=
:;
<
..... rlI!l
't':=
NOTE: To maintain constant power. add approximately

standard, subtract approximately 1% for each 6e below standard.
-Best Power
1% manifold
pressure for
each 6e above
::erll!l
3:~
>::2
20
~2
rlI!lUt
~oo
tlallC
w~
~-,~-
"=<'
"n
PA-44-180
~~
~~
- '--I=-~~:'
~~--=r~~~--_
~-l
SPEED 'POWER
0-
-----
=-rr==::=t::::::':::----
MID CRUISE WEIGHT 3483 LBS.
="
Qo
~
,,0
::2
>tIa
2
n
~
00
~
'Tl~
_.~
~o
.,
"I'
~
~
n~
1"0
~~
"rii
~oo
<~
"
..
~::
~"
n
r-
~:c
NN
~~
-,=,=
CliCI~
... 0'3
;>
"1'''
-~
000
~
Coo>
";;
ECONOMY CRUISE MIXTURE

LEANED TO PE!"K E.G.T.
Cf--
.;009----'
--
n--f-+----F-
~-----
40
30
20
-n
:0
-00'
-:#=-\1-~t,.\.;
~--
==t;:t.~
10
20
30
lie
00"1'
A_'i>.~"
10
.~
~-l
~o
40
120
140
160
1ao
TRUE AIRSPEED - KNOTS
::=
-;>
Z-l
0r-O
~2
.,,~
"'Cii
~oo
<:~
..a..::
"1"7
a::
9-+-
-~
00
>
>",
~@
- -=
:eN
~
~
&0. ....
--..1
'l:lClD
e:
III
~oo
=0-1
"rj>"
-2 ...
li
a:
E=
::>
~ ~
....
ri~o-1
Vt~~
w"::
w~~
-~
til'"
~>
=0-1
>~
...w
U1'
, ClD
N~
-..1=
-~
20-1
o
l""~
~o
"o
">
~
0-1
o
2
POW~~:
C[
C[
:n
7 +---4000
~-' ~:I::-~_
11
.. --;.......
lh~~~JoiI-+=
':1--.
15
T_~Oh
600
~
~
-r+:--==t=""::::::-::-, ..
j@if;ct~r-
=
<
=
~"
==>
~
~
::'
"
~oo~
MIXTURE LEANED TO 1250 F RICH OF PEAK E.G.T. E3;.

3800 POUNDS 108 GAL USABLE FUEL
tt=::
NO WIND
.m:::::;:
I i , .
III
,
NOTE,
SUBTRACT 5% FROM THE RANGE ,
ADO DOlE NAUTICAL MILE FOR
WITH THE 3 BLADE PROP INSTALEACH DEGREE CENTIGRADE
+LATION.
ABOVE STANDARD AND SUBTRACT 1,5 NAUTICAL MILES
FOR EACH DEGREE CENTIGRADE BELOW STANDARD.
RANGE WrrH
EXAMPLE,
NO RESERVE
CRUISE PRESS. ALT. " S500 It.
O.A,T. " _2C {SOBELOW STD,I
POWER" 55%
RANGE W/RESERVE " 702 (1,5x61
~ RANGE W/RESERVE " 693 "I,M,
7 5 ~ RANGE WINO RES. "785 {1.5.SI
65%,
RANGE WINO RES. : 778 N.M.
55%
o
a:
~tJ!'
~
;>
=-
r:;::
:;;
w
.. 3 +-l--l--6000
2"
-'--'
&o.~
t-"
ESTANDARD TEMPERATlJRE"""E
PERFORMANCE CRUISE RANGEM
--,,-f--'-
-10000
~>
O
2
"0
>I~
PA-44-180
"
~
-_~"--'-4-
650
700
750
700
RANGE - NAUTICAL MilES

(INCLUDES CLIMB ANO DESCENT DISTANCE)
750
800
850
000
~5
>0
2
~2
~U1
If'''
Nt!'!'
"1:1'"
t'!lt'!l
,,~
ClO"I:I
"<:-:J
=,,=
::Z
"f'J~
PA..44-180
-13 ..,.......,...14000
STANDARD TEMPERATURE-i,
>UD
z
ClO
CI\
ell
f:'l!l
t!'!''''
~""i
=>
2 Z
=0
::>
~<~
~~~
~"t!'!'
~C;;
;:S."
."e
r"lt!'!'
9~
II:
:::l
1"5::
liII:
,,=
:eIII
W"'''I:I
::c
Vlt'!lt!'!'
z""i
I:':le
t'!l"
t'!l
"1:1
"1:1
75%,
++75%
6S%
III
II.
e
II:
z
:!Ul
-"=
>
5S% POWER
,m
.-.':
~
l-
"1:1"
'''f'J
7+'--
~~
::::
nn
="
-~
00=
J="
11~
"'''1:1
t'!l=
:::::=
_ N
--=-=-
:--~
Q1C~
tHQO
800
900
800
RANGE NAUTICAL MILES

(INCLUDES CLIMB &. DESCENT DISTANCE)
900
1000
1100
::"
->
2~
e-t=
t'!l2
=-

PA-44-UJO, SEMINOLE
SECTION 5
PERFORMANCE
.~i rn
-:TI
. :gu~ ~
..
..,;
ci
-iii
"z
a:
wo
0:0
:>ID
u.
W
D..
...i=
O:W
:>0
Oil)
XW
,0
wO
oz
z<t
<till
..
~c"'
OCll'
zwo
a: w
zz
c(:> - -
jjj
CIlZ
a:..i_
'Hli
II
u z_:>
ui3 ~
<t
I
I
::J.~~
a:WO Ill
W
a:
~ -~~
u<t~;;
Za:NIll_
::J'"
0
0'-
l.l.!
..
u:
-lit
-,..
III
o _
z
w'
u'
z,
lJ tU 1
Ii !! Illl, ~ I ~
rt1m,H: i
li;!I: 'II II
! I';lli II
..
ittIf'
w
>
a:
w
w
a:
mllllill
l~m~r
o:~
:>0'"
zO
WII)
.-
~~ --
...
:>
o
~
11:_
~..,
gI
.-
~-I
III
III
_.
lie
III
III
--
,..If'
III
'ztlll&l
I .. ..
:if5~
--
. i:g
_I
I
II
.' rf'"
.Iil
II
w..
0 ....
Zww
wa:/D
8
o
..
:Iil:
I'
I
l
ff11
II
.LI - 30n.ll.ll\l' 311nSS311d
PERFORMANCE CRUISE ENDURANCE

Figure 5-37
REPORT: VB-860
5-29
SECTION 5
PERFORMANCE

PA44180, SEMINOLE
I
....
III
III
I
jjl
11
dli!l.
ot
..
~
~
1:1 - :lon.LI.Llit :llInSS:llId
ECONOMY CRUISE ENDURANCE

Figure 5-39
REPORT: VB860
530

PA-44-180
::e<00
_e:
1"'lOO
'FUEL, TIME AND DISTANCE TO DESCEND

BOTH ENGINES 2400 RPM a. THROTTLE
AS REQUIRED TO MAINTAIN 165 KIAS
OO1"'l
1"'l0
0"
..
"!'l
00>
AND 500 FPM D

m
fI,
'. I .
.,
p=y\oOO
...i
~::e
1"'l
''''''In
1"'l:r:
~N
....w
...
=~
1"'l:"
~
1"'l
-~
>
2
::e..c
-..c
!"-QI',l
"'1'1
t::::=, zoOO
-.
:;)
~~.
II' '-'-'-\0000
\Q
i"::e
;;;>
WING FLAPS 0
COWL FLAPS CLOSED
D
GEAR
NO
WIND
IIIm
!:
!i
=:=
RET~,~C",:~Pr
I""
OOn
1"'l:=
<t'~
~~'
,i
~>
-""
o
.~?:'
,~
;::
2"""l
;:,"
~'r.
~n
-~}
. !.'."
1"'l0
:=
"'Cl
o
~~~.,
~.
0"
c _
0;"0
"e"'Cl
;>."'Cl
""'1"'l
FT.
.., 00
:=
;>
"""l
'PREss. ~\.T"
o
Z
8000
~"""l
1">
""'2
-n
6000 .
1"'l
"""l
::e
1"'l
"'Cl
::e
1"'l
2
'~
t:--.....:..:.:.-4000
f-::.
._:---r-~--..,..;--f=
,---rr-t--
200l> ,
Example:
Destination airport Dl'ess. alt.. 680 ft.
Destination airport outside air temp.. SoC
CrUise press. alt.. 5500 ft.
Cruise outside air temp.. _2C
Fuel to descend: 3 mlnuo 1 = 2 gal.
Time to descend: 9 minus 2 = 7 mono
Distance to descend 30 minus 4
26 NM
<
til
==
--r+l
QI',l
-=
~="
40
40
20
40
TIME DISTANCE
60
80
a. FUEL TO DESCEND
100
"'Cl
1"'l
:=
""
000
:=1"'l
~n
>:j
ZO
nZ
1"'ltll
"'drJ'J
ua:;e
~~
~t'l'
N"'d
PA-44-180
<
Examp I:
Alrpo rt press. alt.. 6S0 ft.
Out ~e air temp.. soc
Win component: 5 kts. headwind
We ,.: 3430 Ibs.
Lan ,lOg ground roll: 480 ft.
E""
>
2
:!1~
ri:;e
SS
VlO
J,..e
,,-
..... 2
<rJ'J
~.
:=
rJ'J~
E""
E""
+~
'
,+-t
~--
loti
III
"'d
Yo
700
II:
III
Z
::::I
~~
11
III
II:
~~
III
..;
'J'() ~ ~
..;
;)
II:
.~
'fo
,,("'}
'600
z4(
...
:eN
~~
Clll~
Clll
c:J
c:J
Z
is
n::c
,:a}N
::l
.~
::>
>:;e
:!
Iii
w
II:
u::
t'l'
ff
..
...
III
0"
1~
800
..g
III
~~~
:~~
"_::~ ~~
....+ '::1":._..;..
j
.~J!
~rJ'J
~.
~t:
>UI
- ..
"'~I
POWER OFF
WING FLAPS 40
COWL FLAPS OPEN
FULL STALL TOUCHDOWN
ltNOTE
REDUCE LANDING GROUND ROLL
BV 31% IF omONAl LANDING
GEAR HEAV\' DUTY GROUP NO.1
IS INSTAWD. ISEE EQUIPMENT
USTl
~c:'}
~O
:=0
::::2
1LANDING GROUND ROLL

~*STANDARD BRAKES
SHORT fiELD EffORT
If'
_e
:;en
~..,
0-
-40
30
20
10
10
20
30
40
3600
3000
2600
WEIGHT - POUNDS
10
15 400
f'i'l
:=
>
;;
n
"'Cj:=
."!l
tool
-n
CleO
.?"
rJ'J"'d
f'i'lQ
::::e
->
2,.,
0E""Q
t2l2
"'0-"
e::
{!OJ
PA-44-180
!;'
::
>
::e
I"'}
::
h}
,;..0
\Cl
-...I
ClC
Example:
r-
>
2
o
2
c:"':l
o
Airponpress. alt.. 6S0ft.
=>::e
WING FLAPS 40 _ POWER OFF _ COWL FLAPS OPEN

PAVED lEVEL DRY RUNWAY
FUll STALL TOUCHDOWN
APPROACH SPEED AS SCHEDULED
3:>
-"1']
2-l
o
=
==
==
==
>
Equipment Ust) ,
,
"1']
=
ClC
=>
':;,.y;._..",- ;
-o
O~
....
'
~ . '!>.ti'-'~"~
~
_._,
"""'~
.' .
=>
t..>~
::e
>
-l
~'f\' ,
.".
Yl
Yl
VI<
J:,.{!Oj
V\::e
\oN
"'0
dutyGroupNo.'Installed.IS....
rio
<
::e
_--0
-'I"'}
o
::e
::'
r-I"'}
Reduce total 1..._.... __.......__ ,.

15% if optional landing
h _.
-l
~{!Oj
"'0
rl'Jl"'}
{!OJ:=
~o
rI'J
..,e:.
:-l
==
>
i-:
r-:--
::e
::e
{!OJ
::e
=>
",::LANDING ~ISTANCE bVER '50 FT: BARRIER

~
STANDARD BRAKES
~ SHORT FIELD EFFORT
OutsIde aIr temp.. SC

Wind component: 6 kts. headwmd
WeIght: 3107 Ibs.
Approach speed: 6S KIAS
Total landing distance: 1200 ft.
"T]2
::e
{!OJ
>."'0
'''{!OJ
i"'::e
---.L.
_.
"'0
~
::e
"!1
OrI'J
._--
----
::e~
::1"'}
>::
2 0
I"'}
~UI
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION
WEIGHT AND BALANCE
Paragraph
Page
No.
No.
6.1
6.3
6.5
6.7
6.9
General..........................................
Airplane Weighing Procedure .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Weight and Balance Data and Record... . . . . . . . . . . . .
Weight and Balance Determination for Flight..... . . ..
Instructions for Using the Weight and Balance Plotter..
6-1
6-2
6-5
6-9
6-13
REPORT: VB-860
6-1

PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
SECTION 6
WEIGHT AND BALANCE
SECTION 6
WEIGHT AND BALANCE
6.1 GENERAL
In order to achieve the performance and flying characteristics which are
designed into the airplane, it must be flown with the weight and center of
gravity (CG.) position within the approved operating range (envelope).
Although the airplane offers flexibility of loading, it cannot be flown with
the maximum number of adult passengers, full fuel tanks and maximum
baggage. With the flexibility comes responsibility. The pilot must insure that
the airplane is loaded within the loading envelope before he makes a takeoff.
Misloading carries consequences for any aircraft. An overloaded
airplane will not take off, climb or cruise as well as a properly loaded one.
The heavier the airplane is loaded, the less climb performance it will have.
Center of gravity is a determining factor in flight characteristics. If the
C.G. is too far forward in any airplane, it may be difficult to rotate for
takeoff or landing. If the C.G. is too far aft, the airplane may rotate
prematurely on takeoff or tend to pitch up during climb. Longitudinal
stability will be reduced. This can lead to inadvertent stalls and even spins;
and spin recovery becomes more difficult as the center of gravity moves aft of
the approved limit.
A properly loaded airplane, however, will perform as intended. This
airplane is designed to provide performance within the flight envelope.
Before the airplane is delivered, it is weighed, and a basic empty weight and
C.G. location is computed (basic empty weight consists of the standard
empty weight of the airplane plus the optional equipment). Using the basic
empty weight and CG,location, the pilot can determine the weight and C.G.
position for the loaded airplane by computing the total weight and moment
and then determining whether they are within the approved envelope.

REPORT: VB-860
61
SECTION 6
WEIGHT AND BALANCE

PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
The basic empty weight and e.G. location are recorded in the Weight
and Balance Data Form (Figure 6-5) and the Weight and Balance Record
(Figure 6-7). The current values should always be used. Whenever new
equipment is added or any modification work is done, the mechanic responsible for the work is required to compute a new basic empty weight and
e.G. position and to WI ite these in the Aircraft log Book and the Weight
and Balance Record 1he owner should make sure that it is done.
A weight and balance calculation is necessary in determining how
much fuel or baggage can be boarded so as to keep within allowable limits.
Check calculations prior to adding fuel to insure against overloading.
The following pages are forms used in weighing an airplane in
production and in computing basic empty weight, e.G. position, and useful
load. Note that the useful load includes usable fuel, baggage, cargo and
passengers. Following this is the method for computing takeoff weight and
e.G.
6.3 AIRPLANE WEIGHING PROCEDURE
At the time of delivery, Piper Aircraft Corporation provides each
airplane with the basic empty weight and center of gravity location. This
data is supplied by Figure 6-5.
The removal or addition of equipment or airplane modifications can
affect the basic empty weight and center of gravity. The following is a
weighing procedure to determine this basic empty weight and center of
gravity location:
(a) Preparation
(I) Be certain that all items checked in the airplane equipment
list are installed in the proper location in the airplane.
(2) Remove excessive dirt, grease, moisture, and foreign items
such as rags and tools. from the airplane before weighing.
(3) Defuel airplane. Then open all fuel drains until all
remaining fuel is drained. Operate each engine until
all undrainable fuel is used and engine stops. Then add the
unusable fuel (2.0 gallons total, 1.0 gallons each wing).
REPORT: VB-8M
6-2


PA-44-J80, SEMINOLE
SECTION 6
WEIGHT AND BALANCE
CAUTiON
Whenever the fuel system is completely drained

and fuel is replenished it will be necessary to run
the engines for a minimum of 3 minutes at 1000
RPM on each tank to insure no air exists in the
fuel supply lines.
(4) Fill with oil to full capacity.
(5) Place pilot and copilot seats in fourth (4th) notch, aft of
forward position. Put flaps in the fully retracted position
and all control surfaces in the neutral position. Tow bar
should be in the proper location and entrance and baggage
door closed.
(6) Weigh the airplane inside a closed building to prevent
errors in scale readings due to wind.
(b) Leveling
(I) With airplane on scales. block main gear oleo pistons in the
fully extended position.
(2) Level airplane (refer to Figure 6-3) deflating nose wheel
tire. to center bubble on level.
(c) Weighing - Airplane Basic Empty Weight
(I) With the airplane level and brakes released, record the
weight shown on each scale. Deduct the tare, if any. from
each reading.

REPORT: VB-860
6-3
SECTION 6
WEIGHT AND BALANCE

PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
Scale
Reading
Scale Position and Symbol

N ose Wheel
Tare
Net
Weight
(N)
--(R)
R ight Main Wheel
Left Main Wheel
(L)
Basic Empty Weight, as Weighed (T)

WEIGHING FORM
Figure 6-1
(d) Basic Empty Weight Center of Gravity
(I) The following geometry applies to the PA-44-180 airplane
when it is level. Refer to Leveling paragrap1i 6.3 (b).

Top View
Nacelle
. Fairing (Outboard of Nacelle)
Level Points
(Fuselage Left Side)
'--r-+-__
A = 87
B = 109.7
REPORT: VB-860
6-4
Wing Leading Edge
The datum is 78.4 inches

ahead of the wing leading
edge at Wing Station 106.
LEVELING DIAGRAM
Figure 6-3

PA.4~.180, SEMINOLE
SECTION 6
WEIGHT AND BALANCE
(2) The basic empty weight center of gravity (as weighed

including optional equipment, full oil and unusable fuel)
can be determined by the following formula:
C.G. Arm = N (A) + (R + L) (B)
T
Where: T
inches
=N + R + L
6.5 WEIGHT AND BALANCE DATA AND RECORD

The Basic Empty Weight, Center of Gravity Location and Useful Load
listed in Figure 6-5 are for the airplane as delivered from the factory. These
figures apply only to the specific airplane serial number and registration
number shown.
The basic empty weight of the airplane as delivered from the factory has
been entered in the Weight and Balance Record (Figure 6-7). This form is
provided to present the current status of the airplane basic empty weight
and a complete history of previous modifications. Any change to the
permanently installed equipment or modification which affects weight or
moment must be entered in the Weight and Balance Record.

REPORT: VB-860
6-5
SECTION 6
WEIGHT AND BALANCE

PA..44-180, SEMINOLE
MODEL PA-44-180, SEMINOLE

Airplane Serial Number
Regis!, ~,1ion Number
Date.
AIRPLANE BASIC EMPTY WEIGHT

C.G. Arm
Weight x (Inches Aft = Moment
of Datum)
(In-Us)
(Lbs)
Item
Actual
Standard Empty Weight'" Computed
Optional Equipment
Basic Empty Weight
"'The standard empty weight includes full oil capacity and 2.0 gallons of
unusable fuel.
AIRPLANE USEFUL LOAD - NORMAL CATEGORY OPERATION
(Gross Weight) - (Basic Empty Weight) = Useful Load
(3800 Ibs.) - (
Ibs.)
lbs.
THIS BASIC EMPTY WEIGHT, e.G. AND US. EFUL LOAD ARE
FOR THE AIRPLANE AS LICENSED AT THE FACTORY. REFER

I TO
APPROPRIATE AIRCRAFT RECORD WHEN ALTERATIONS
HAVE BEEN MADE.
WEIGHT AND BALANCE DATA FORM

Figure 6-5
REPORT: VB-860
6-6


PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
...
C
11>0
u ...
E::
-.c:
~~
aJII>
II>
::;;
bIl~
J:I
5C'"....
::3
co.
::l
II>
.-.
-:..0
~LlJ
bIl
SECTION 6
WEIGHT AND BALANCE
:::t...J
tf
i--
..
::l
1---4-.-------------------1
~
.c:
Z
c
.9
til
6h
-I
II>
~I-_...l-_~
(-)
P~AOW::l~
(+) P~PPV
.
< ...
u
;:;
::l
Z
~
..
~
<:
t:l.
c:
CII
'- U
0 t.:::
C
.S! 0
:0
.. ..
0.:::;
i:
u
til
Cl
"0
111
.~
1)
Cl
til
<
'ON W::lll
1-----+-------------------1
B
WEiGHT AND BALANCE RECORD

.
Figure 6-7
REPORT: VB-84iO
6-7
SECTION 6
WEIGHT AND BALANCE
...
ou
.l:I
u-.c
lXlOU
co~
eo
ES::
"'co
<11_
0-..
=....
cco.
t1>
O::LIJ
::I

PA44180, SEMINOLE
~~I
::18
cf
r----
couo
ES::
0_.
...ou
.l:I
.c
.c
!:!l
::I
.9
~
::::!l
t1>
c
<11
e--:...
c
<:~
ou
~
---
-:..0
~:::.
co
ou
- 0::
(-)
P:>AOW:>~
(+) P:>PPV
~
~
...
...ou
.l:I
...
<: 9<11
c
'- U
0 ;,;::
:;
o.~
t:
'"
::I
.-
ou
VI
!---
...0
'oN W:l1I
l:)",
<11
00
WEIGHT AND BALANCE RECOR!' (cont)

Figure 6-7 (cont)
REPORT: VB-860
6-8

PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
SECTION 6
WEIGHT AND BALANCE
6.7 WEIGHT AND BALANCE DETERMINATION FOR FLIGHT

(a) Add the weight of all items to be loaded to the basic empty weight.
(b) Use the Loading Graph (Figure 6-13) to determine the moment of
all items to be carried in the airplane.
(c) Add the moment of all items to be loaded to the basic empty weight
moment.
(d) Divide the total moment by the total weight to determine the CG
location
(e) By using the figures of item (a) and item (d) (above), locate a point
nil the C G range and weight graph (Figure 6-15) If the point falls
within the C G envelope. the loading meets the weight and balance
reqUIrements

REPORT: VB-860
6-1)
SECTION 6
WEIGHT AND BALANCE

PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
Weight
(Lbs)
Basic Empty Weight
Pilot and Front Passenger
Passengers (Rear Seats)
Fuel (108 Gallon Maximum Usable)
Baggage (200 Lb. Limit)
Ramp Weight (3816 Lbs. Max.)
Fuel Allowance for Engine
Start, Taxi & Runup
TlIke-off Weight (3800 Lbs. Max.)
Arm Aft
Datum
(Inches)
Moment
(In-Lbs)
340.0
340.0
80.5
118.1
95.0
142.8
27370
40154
-16.0
95.0
-1520
The center of gravity (CO.) for the take-off weight of this sample loading
inches aft of the datum line. Locate this point (
) on
problem is at
the CG. range and weight graph. Since this point falls within the weight CG. envelope, this loading meets the weight and balance requirements.
Take-off Weight
Minus Estimated Fuel Burn-off
(climb & cruise) @ 6.0 Lbs/Gal.
Landing Weight
95.0
Locate the cehter of gravity of the landing weight on the CG. range and
weight graph. Since this point falls within the weight - C.G. envelope, the
loading may be assumed acceptable for landing.
IT IS THE RESPONSiBILITY OF THE PILOT AND A1RCRAFT
OWNER TO lNSURE THAT THE AIRPLANE IS LOADED
PROPERLY AT ALL TIMES.
SAMPLE LOADING PROBLEM

Figure 6-9
REPORT: VB-860
6-10

REVISED: MARCH t, 1980

PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
SECTION 6
WEIGHT AND BALANCE
Weight
(Lbs)
Basic Empty Weight
Pilot and Front Passenger
Passengers (Rear Seats)
Fuel (108 Gallon Maximum Usable)
Baggage (200 Lb. Limit)
Ramp Weight (3816 Lbs. Max.)
Fuel Allowance for Engine
Start, Taxi & Runup
Take-off Weight (3800 Lbs Max.)
Arm Aft
Datum
(Inches)
Moment
(In-Lbs)
80.5
118.1
95.0
142.8
-16.0
950
-1520
The center of gravity (e.G) for the take-off weight of this

loading
problem is at
inches aft of the datum line. Locate this point (
) on
the e.G. range and weight graph. If this point falls within the weight e.G. envelope, this loading meets the weight and balance requirements.
Take-off Weight
Minus Estimated Fuel Burn-off
(climb & cruise) @ 6.0 Lbs/Gal.
Landing Weight
95.0
Locate the center of gravity of the landing weight on the e.G range and
weight graph. If this point falls within the weight - C.G. envelope, the
loading may be assumed acceptable for landing.
IT IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE PILOT AND AIRCRAFT
OWNER TO INSURE THAT THE AIRPLANE IS LOADED
PROPERLY AT ALL TIMES.
WEIGHT AND BALANCE LOADING FORM

Figure 6-11
ISSUED: MARCH I, 1980
REPORT: VB-860
6-10a
SECTION 6
WEIGHT AND BALANCE

PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
REPORT: VB-860
6-10b
ISSlJED: MARCH I, 1980

PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
SECTION 6
WEIGHT AND BALANCE
700
860
800
1 \I \
, {J IH n.
660
"
I'
;t:11i-t t '
600
I.
f~
,- --
di!Hir-1\- i rtttil:-l:t'~rmm:1tm IJl:11:i J
i He
460
400
::I
360
'i:
~300
~;
1-
!It
~ 260
...
200
160
10
16
20
26
30
36
40
46
60
66
60
66
MOMENT /1000 (POUNDS-INCHES)
LOADING GRAPH
Figure 613
REPORT: VB-860
6n
SECTION 6
WEIGHT AND BALANCE
3800
...

PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
89
MAX TO AND
LANDING WEIGHT 1 /
90
91
88
3700
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
86/
3600
86/
3400-eli
...J
3300 .~
:x::
3200 C)
I I
iii
3100 3:
I IPI
I /;
t:
c(
II:
()
2900 -$
c(
I l~
1 7$
2800 .84
2700
'1\
2600 -~
Co
2600 -~
:\
2400 --CIll
~
I I
2300
93
I I
87/
3600
3000
92
7
1
84 86 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93
C.G. LOCATION (INCHES AFT DATUM)
C.G. RANGE AND WEIGHT

Figure 6-15
REPORT: VB860
6-12

REVISED: MARCH I, 1980

PA-44t80, SEMINOLE
SECTION 6
WEIGHT AND BALANCE
6.9 INSTRUCTIONS FOR USING THE WEIGHT AND BALANCE

PLOTTER
This plotter is provided to enable the pilot quickly and conveniently to:
(a) Determine the total weight and e.G. position.
(b) Decide how to change his load if his first loading is not within the
allowable envelope.
Heat can warp or ruin the plotter if it is left in the sunlight.
Replacement plotters may be purchased from Piper dealers and distributors.
When the airplane is delivered, the basic weight and basic e.G. will be
recorded on the computer. These should be changed any time the basic
weight or e.G. location is changed.
The plotter enables the user to add weights and corresponding moments
graphically. The effect of adding or disposing of useful load can easily be
seen. The plotter does not cover the situation where cargo is loaded in
locations other than on the seats or in the baggage compartments.
Brief instructions are given on the plotter itself. To use it, first plot a
point on the grid to locate the basic weight and e.G. location. This can be
put on more or less permanently because it will not change until the airplane
is modified. Next, position the zero weight end of anyone of the loading slots
over this point. Using a pencil, draw a line along the slot to the weight ~hich
will be carried in that location. Then position the zero weight end of the next
slot over the end of this line and draw another line representing the weight
which will be located in this second position. When all the loads have been
drawn in this manner, the final end of the segmented line locates the total
load aI\d the e.G. position of the airplane for takeoff. If this point is not
within the allowable envelope it will be necessary to remove fuel, baggage, or
passengers and I or to rearrange baggage and passengers to get the final point
to fall within the envelope.
Fuel burn-off and gear movement do not significantly affect the center
elf gravity.
REPORT: VB-860
6-13
SECTION 6
WEIGHT AND BALANCE

PA-44180, SEMINOLE
SAMPLE PROBLEM
A sample problem will demonstrate the use of the weight and balance
plotter.
Assume a basic weight and CG. location of2364 pounds at 86.14 inches
respectively. We wish to carry a pilot and 3 passengers. Two men weighing
180 and 200 pounds will occupy the front seats, and two children weighing
80 and 100 pounds will ride in the rear. Two suitcases weighing 25 pounds
and 20 pounds respectively, will be carried in the rear compartment. We wish
to carry 60 gallons of fuel. Will we be within the safe envelope?
(a) Place a dot on the plotter grid at 2364 pounds and 86.14 inches to
represent the basic airplane. (See illustration.)
(b) Slide the slotted plastic into position so that the dot is under the slot
for the forward seats, at zero weight.
(c) Draw a line up the slot to the 380 pound position (180+ 200) and put
a dot.
(d) Continue moving the plas~ic and plotting points to account for
weight in the rear seats (80 + 100), baggage compartment (45), and
fuel tanks (360).
(e) As can be seen rrom the illustration, the final dot shows the total
weight to be 3329 pounds with the CG. at 89.30. This is well within
the envelope.
(f) There will be room for more fuel.
As fuel is burned off, the weight and CO. will follow down the fuel line
and stay within the envelope for landing.
REPORT: VB-8M
6-14

PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
SECTION 6
WEIGHT AND BALANCE
SAMPLE PROBLEM
MAX. T.O. AND

3800 LANDING WEIGHT-
3 7 0 0 - - -_ _......::8:.;8~-.J._-+---I--_I____I
3600 ---~"-+--+---+---+---I---I---I
3600--'::':;'L--4---I---+---I---I---I---iJ
86
3400- +---II--+--+--+---+--+.----;I---I
ui
II)
...::a:
3300 --!...f+.-+---.4I---+--+.1-3200-CJ~-4--4--+---+l--+--l'----+--I
iii
31 00 .~i-"--+-+--4--+-':"'=;:;:':"'-4--+---I
3000
t:
~"--l.--+--t---J_~-J.--I_ _I_--.I
2900 -!: -i--I---.4I---+--7lF---+---.4I---f----jr--....
<
2800- 84.-I-.-4-_"-,,/;2700 --4--4--H-_+_--.4~--+--+-+--f-__I

2600 -
tC
00 \---!---Uo
t:
2500 -~ \--4---41--1---1-+--+---1---1----.1
~
2400--~\--l.--U--4---l-.J'---..L--l--+----'
2300
"'" 1.-.-.""-';;';';O.....;;;,,;,;;;~~I......"""""'"

REPORT: VB-860
6-15
SECTION'
WEIGHT AND BALANCE

PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
REPORT: VB-860
6-16
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 7
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
OF THE AIRPLANE AND ITS SYSTEMS
Paragraph
Page
No.
7.1
7.3
7.5
7.7
7,9
7.11
7.13
7.15
7.17
7.19
7.21
7.23
7.25
7.27
7.29
7.31
7.33
7.35
7.37
7.39
7.41
No.
The Airplane .. ,
,,.,
, .. , . . .
Airframe
,.,
",.......
Engines
,............
Propellers
Landing Gear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake System
Flight Control System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel System......................................
Electrical System..................................
Vacuum System...................................
'Pitot Static System...........
Instrument Panel
,
,.....
Heating, Ventilating and Defrosting System
,
,...
Cabin Features. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stall Warning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Baggage Area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Finish. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Emergency Locator Transmitter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Piper External Power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Propeller Synchrophaser. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Carburetor Ice Detection System
7-1
7-1
7-2
7-5
7-6
7-12
7-12
7-14
7-16
7-21
7-23
7-25
7-27
7-30
7-32
1-32
7-32
7-33
7-36
7-36
7-3/
REPORT: VB-860
7-i
PIPt:R AIRCRAFT CORPORATION

SECTION 7
PA44J80, SEMINOLE
DESCRIPTION & OPERATION
SECTION 7
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
OF THE AIRPLANE AND ITS SYSTEMS
7.1 THE AIRPLANE
The Seminole is a twin-engine, all metal, retractable landing gear,
airplane. It has seating for up to four occupants and has a two hundred
pound capacity luggage compartment.
7.3 AIRFRAME
With the exception of the steel engine mounts and landing gear, the
fiberglass nose cone, cowling nose bowls and tips of wings, and the ABS
thermoplastic extremities (tail fin, rudder and stabilator), the basic airframe
is of aluminum alloy. Aerobatics are prohibited in this airplane since the
structure is not designed for aerobatic loads.
The fuselage is a semi-monocoque structure with a passenger door on
the forward right side, a cargo door on the aft right side with an emergency
egress door on the forward left side.
The wing is of a semi-tapered design and employs a laminar flow
NACA 65 -415 airfoil section. The main spar is located at approximately
40% of the chord. The wings are attached to the fuselage by the insertion of
the butt ends of the spar into a spar box carry-through, which is an integral
part of the fuselage structure. The bolting of the spar ends into the spar box
carry-through structure, which is located under the rear seats, provides in
effect a continuous main spar. The wings are also attached fore and aft of the
main spar by an auxiliary front spar and a rear spar. The rear spar, in addition to taking torque and drag loads, provides a mount for flaps and ailerons. The four-position wing flaps are mechanically controlled by a handle
located between the front seats. When fully retracted, the r:ght flap locks
into place to provide a step for cabin entry. Each nacelle contains one fuel
tank.
REPORT: VB860
71
SECTION 7
PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
A vertical stabilizer, an all-movable horizontal stabilator, and a rudder
make up the empennage. The stabilator, which is mounted on top of the fin,
incorporates an anti-servo tab which provides longitudinal stability and
trim. This tab moves in the same direction as the stabilator, but with increased travel. Rudder effectiveness is increased by an anti-servo tab on the
rudder.
7.5 ENGINES
The aircraft is powered by two Lycoming four-cylinder engines, each
rated at 180 horsepower at 2700 RPM at sea level. The engines are air cooled
and are equipped with oil coolers with low temperature bypass systems and
engine-mounted oil filters. A winterization plate is provided to restrict air
during winter operation. (See Winterization in Section 8.) Asymmetric
thrust during takeoff and climb is eliminated by the counter-rotation of the
engines, the left engine rotating in a clockwise direction when viewed from
the cockpit, and the right engine rotating counterclockwise.
The engines are accessible through removable cowls. The upper cowl
half is attached with quarter-turn fasteners and is removable. Engine mounts
are constructed of steel tubing, and dynafocal engine mounts are provided to
reduce vibration.
The induction air box incorporates a manually operated two-way valve
which allows the carburetor to receive either induction air which ~asses
through the air filter or heated air which bypasses the filter. Carburetor heat
selection provides heated air to the carburetor in the event of carburetor
icing, and also allows selection of an alternate source of air in the event the
induction air source or the air filter becomes blocked with ice, snow, freezing
rain, etc. Carburetor heat selection provides air which is unfiltered; therefore, it should not be used during ground operation when dust or other contaminants might enter the system. The primary (through the filter) induction
source should always be used for takeoffs.
Engine controls consist of a throttle, a propeller control and a mixture
control lever for each engine. These controls are located on the control
quadrant on the lower center of the instrument panel where they ale
accessible to both the pilot and the copilot (Figure 7-1). The controls utilize
teflon-lined control cables to reduce friction and binding.
REPORT: VB-860
7~2
PIPER AIRCRAFT CORPORAorION

SECTION 7
PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
CONTROL PEDESTAL
Figure 7-1
REVISED: MARCH I, 1980
REPORT:
VB-86~
7-3
SECTION 7
DESCRIPTION &. OPERATION
PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
PULL-CLOSE
PULL-CLOSE
~~%k
L ~~t~
PUSH-OPEN
PUSH-OPEN
EARlV MODEL
CURRENT MODEL
COWL FLAP CONTROL

Figure 7-3
The throttle levers are used to adjust the manifold pressure. They
incorporate a gf?ar up warning horn switch which is activated during the last
portion of travel of the throttle levers to the low power position. If the
landing gear is not locked down. the horn will sound until the gear is down
and locked or until the power setting is increased. This is a feature to warn
the pilot of an inadvertent gear up landing.
The propeller control levers are used to adjqst the propeller speed from
high RPM to feather. .
The mixture control levers are used to adjust the air to fuel ratio. An
engine is shut down by the placing of the mixture control lever in the full lean
(idle cut-off) pnsition.
The friction adjustment lever on the right side of the control quadrant
may be adjusted to increase or decrease the friction holding the throttle,
propeller, and mixture controls or to lock the controls in a selected position.
REPORT: VB-860
7-4


SECTION 7
PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
DESCRIPTION 8 OPERATION
The carburetor heat controls are located on the control quadrant just
below the engine control levers. When a carburetor heat lever is in the up, or
off, position the engine is operating on filtered air; when the lever is in the
down, or on, position the engine is operating on unfiltered, heated air.
The cowl flap control levers (Figure 7-3), located below the control
quadrant, are used to regulate cooling air for the engines. The levers have
three positions: full open, full closed, and intermediate. A lock incorporated
in each control lever locks the cowl flap in the selected position. To operate
the cowl flaps, depress the lock and move the lever toward the desired
setting. Release the lock after initial movement and continue movement of
the lever. The control will stop and lock into place at the next setting. The
lock must be depressed for each selection of a new cowl flap setting.
All throttle operations should be made with a smooth, not too rapid
movement to prevent unnecessary engine wear or damage to the engines.
1.7 PROPELLERS
Counter-rotation of the propellers provides balanced thrust during
takeoff and climb and eliminates the "critical engine" factor in single-engine
flight.
Constant speed, controllable pitch and feathering Hartzell propellers
are installed as standard equipment. The propellers mount directly to the
engine crankshafts. Pitch is ~ontrolled by oil and nitrogen pressure. Oil
pressure sends a propeller toward the high RPM or unfeather position;
nitrogen pressure and a large spring sends a propeller toward the low RPM
or feather position and also prevents propeller overspeeding. Governors,
one on each engine, supply engine oil at various pressures through the propeller shafts to maintain constant RPM settings. A governor controls engine
speed by varying the pitch of the propeller to match load torque to engine
torque in response to changing flight conditions. The recommended nitrogen pressure to be used when charging the unit is listed on placards on the
propeller domes and inside the spinners. This pressure varies with ambient
temperature at the time of charging. Although dry nitrogen gas is recommended, compressed air may be used provided it contains no moisture. For
more detailed instructions, see "Propeller Service" in Section 8 of this
Handbook.
REPORT: VB-860
7-5
SECTION 7
PA44-180, SEMINOLE
Each propeller is controlled by the propeller control levers located in the
center of the power control quadrant. Feathering of a propeller is accomplished by moving the control fully aft through the low RPM detent, into the
FEATHER position. Feathering takes place in approximately six seconds.
Unfeathering is accomplished by moving the propeller control forward and
engaging the starter until the propeller is wind milling.
A feathering lock, operated by centrifugal force, prevents feathering
during engine shut down by making it impossible to feather any time the
engine speed falls below 950 RPM. For this reason, when airborne, and the
pilot wishes to feather a propeller to save an engine, he must be sure to move
the propeller control into the FEATHER position before the engine speed
drops below 950 RPM.
7.9 LANDING GEAR
The aircraft is equipped with hydraulically operated, fully retractable,
tricycle landing gear.
Hydraulic pressure for gear operation is furnished by an electrically
powered, reversible hydraulic pump (refer to Figures 7-7 and 7-9). The pump
is activated by a two-position gear selector switch located to the I~ft of the
control quadrant on the instrument panel (Figure 7-5). The gear selector
switch, which has a wheel-shaped knob, must be pulled out before it is
moved to the UP or DOWN position. When hydraulic pressure is exerted in
one direction, the gear is retracted; when it is exerted in the other direction,
the gear is extended. Gearextension or retraction normally takes six to seven
seconds.
CAUTION
If the landing gear is in transit, and the
hydraulic pump is running, it is NOT advisable
to move the gear selector switch to the opposite
position before the gear has reached its full
travel limit, because a sudden reversal may
damage the electric pump.
REPORT: VB860
7-6

PIP~R
AIRCRAFT CORPORATION
SECTION 7
PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
The landing gear is designed to extend even in the event of hydraulic

failure. Since the gear is held in the retracted position by hydraulic pressure,
should the hydraulic system fail for any reason, gravity wil1 allow the gear to
extend. When the landing gear is retracted, the main wheels retract inboard
into the wings and the nose wheel retracts aft into the nose section. Springs
assist in gear extension and in locking the gear in the down position. After
tht: gears are down and the downlock hooks engage, springs maintain force
on each hook to keep it locked until it is released by hydraulic pressure.
To extend and lock the gears in the event of hydraulic failure, it is
necessary only to relieve the hydraulic pressure. An emergency gear
extension knob, located directly beneath the gear selector switch is provided
for this purpose. Pulling this knob releases the hydraulic pressure holding
the gear in the up position and allows the gear to fall free. Before pulling the
emergency gear extension knob, place the landing gear selector switch in the
DOWN position to prevent the pump from trying to raise the gear. If the
emergency gear knob has been pulled out to lower the gear by gravity, due to
a ~ear system malfunction, leave the control in its extended position until the
airplane has been put on jacks to check the proper function of the landing
gear hydraulic and electrical systems. See the Service Manual for proper
landing gear system check out procedures. If the airplane is being used for
training purposes or a pilot check out mission, and the emergency gear
extension knob has been pulled out, it may be pushed in again when desired
if there has not been any apparent malfunction of the landing gear system.
When the gear is fully extended or fully retracted and the gear selector is
in the corresponding position, electrical limit switches stop the flow of
current to the motor of the hydraulic pump. The three green lights directly
above the landing gear selector switch illuminate to indicate that each of the
three landing gears is down and locked. A convex mirror on the left engine
nacelle both serves as a taxiing aid and allows the pilot to visually confirm
the condition of the nose gear. If the gear is in neither the fun up nor the full
down position, a red warning light on the instrument panel illuminates.
Should the throttle be placed in a low setting - as for a landing approach while the gear is retracted, a warning horn sounds to alert the pilot that the
gear is retracted. The gear warning homemits a 90 cycles per minute beeping
sound.
REPORT: VB-860
7-1
SECTION 7
PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
LANDING GEAR SELECTOR

Figure 7-5
REPORT: VB-8liG
7-8

SECTION 7
PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
The green gear lights are dimmed automatically when the navigation
lights are turned on. For this reason, if the navigation lights are turned on in
the daytime, it is difficult to see the landing gear lights. lfthe green lights are
not observed after the landing gear selector switch is placed in the DOWN
position, the first thing to check is the position of the navigation lights
switch.
If one or two of the three green lights do not illuminate when the gear
DOWN position has been selected, any of the following conditions could
exist for each light that is out:
(a) The gear is not locked down.
(b) A bulb is burned out.
(c) There is a malfunction in the indicating system.
In order to check the bulbs, the square indicator lights can be pulled out and
interchanged.
A micro switch incorporated in the throttle quadrant activates the gear
warning horn under the following conditions:
(a) The gear is not locked down and the manifold pressure has fallen
below 14 inches on either one or both engines.
(b) The gear selector switch is in the UP position when the airplane is on
the ground.
(c) The gear selector switch is in the UP position and wing flaps are
extended to the second or third notch position.
To prevent inadvertent gear retraction should the gear selector be placed
in the UP position when the airplane is on the ground, a squat switch located
on the left main gear will prevent the hydraulic pump from actuating if the
master switch is turned on. On takeoff, when the landing gear oleo strut
drops to its full extension, the safety switch closes to complete the circuit
which allows the hydraulic pump to be activated to raise the landing gear
when the gear selector is moved to the UP position. During the preflight
check, be sure the landing gear selector is in the DOWN position and that the
three green gear indicator lights are illuminated. On takeoff, the gear should
he retracted before an airspeed of 109 KIAS is exceeded. The landing gear
uay be lowered at any speed up to 140 KIAS.
The hydraulic reservoir for landing gear operation is an integral part of
the gear hydraulic pump. Access to the combination pump and reservoir is
through a panel in the baggage compartment. For filling instructions, see
the Service Manual.

REPORT: VB-860
7-9
SECTION 7
PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
L.ANDING GUll
..
COtl;lftOl.
WARNIN8
'J
UP
LIMIT
s.
l.fT
UP
_jGUR
TrRM
J S'
t,.IMIT
NC
NO NO
fAM'NAl
NO
He
UP
OOWN
;:IIT I 0
Ne
NOSt
GEA"
He
OOWN
\.Ihllr
S.
l!.,..lT
RIGH'"
Ne
.J sw.
GUR
o
NO
NO
H.... O'tAULIC
""I'
MotOR
JP:1\ M
m NC
"SWITCH
...
JICUlsuRr
A80yr
GUR
r~'~11-
SlltT
SWITCH
...
TO
>-----,.L
I.IGHTS
LANDING GEAR ELECTRICAL SYSTEM SCHEMATIC

Figure 7-7
REPORT: VB-860
7-10


SECTION 7
PA-44180, SEMINOLE
r - - : F T MAIN GEAR
"~'DRAULIC CYLINDER
RIGHT MAIN GEAR

H'1DRAULIC
CYLlNDE~
UP
UP
DOWN
DOWN
r-----
NOSE GEAR
HYDRAULIC
r---
CYLINDER
PRESSURE
SWITCH
PRESSURE SWI1CH
on
Al 1800 '100 PSI
ON AT 2;00 400 PSI BE

LOW OF"
RESTAICTOR
UP
DOWN
---------<f-lFREE FALL
CONTROL
THERMAL
RELIEf'
4OOOP51
LOW
PRESSURE
CONTROL
650tl~
PSI
GEAR UP
CHECK VALVE
DELIVERED PRESS
400~800
PSI
LANDING GEAR HYDRAULIC SYSTEM SCHEMATIC

Figure 7-9
REViSED: SEPTEMBER 14,1979
REPORT: VB860
711
SECTION 7
PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
The nose gear is steerable through a 30 degree arc either side of center by
use of a combination of full rudder pedal travel and brakes. A gear
centering spring, incorporated in the nose gear steering system. prevents
shimmy tendencies. A bungee assembly reduces ground steering effort and
dampens shocks and bumps during taxiing. Wh,en the gear is retracted. the
nose wheel centers as it enters the wheel wel1: and the steering linkage
disengages to reduce pedal loads in night.
.
The main landing gear carries 6.00 x 6. 8-ply tires. The nose wheel has a
5.00 x 5. 6-ply tire. For information on servicing the tires, see "Tire Inflation"
in Section 8 of this Handbook.
Struts for the landing gear are air-oil assemblies. Strut exposure should
be checked during each preflight inspection. If a need for service or adjustment is indicated. refer to the instructions printed on the units. Should more
detailed landing gear service information be required, refer to the Service
Manual.
7,11 BRAKE SYSTEM
The brake system is designed to meet all normal braking needs. Two
single-disc, double puck brake assemblies, one on each main gear, are
actuated by toe brake pedals mounted on both the pilot's and copilot's
rudder pedals. A brake system hydraulic reservoir. independent of the
landing gear hydraulic reservoir. is located in the rear top of the nose
compartment. Brake fluid should be maintained at the level marked on the
reservoir. For further information see "Brake Service" in Section 8 of this
Handbook.
The parking brake is engaged by depressing the toe brake pedals and
pulling out the parking brake knob located on the lower instlUment panel
adjacent to the throttle quadrant. The parking brake is released by
depressing the toe brake pedals and pushing in the parking brake knob.
7.13 FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
Dual !light controls are installed as standard equipment. The controls
actuate the control surfaces through a cable system. The horizontal tail
surface (stabilator) is of the al1 movable slab type with an anti-servo tab
mounted on the trailing edge. This tab, actuated by a control mounted on the
console between t he front scats. also acts as a longitudinal trim tab (refer to
Figure 7-11).
REPORT: VB-860
7-12
ISSllED: MARCH 23, 1978

SECTION 7
PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
/-".
J/ ;'
(,
CONSOLE
Figure 7-11
REPORT: VB-860
7-13
SECTION 7
PA44180, SEMINOLE
The vertical tail is fitted with a rudder which incorporates a combination
rudder trim and anti-servo tab. The rudder trim control is located on the
control console between the front seats.
The naps are manually operated and spring loaded to return to the
retracted position. A four-position nap control lever (Figure 7-11) between
the front seats adjusts the naps for reduced landing speeds and glide path
control. The naps have three extended positions - 10,25 and 40 degrees - as
well as the fully retracted position. A button on the end of the lever must be
depressed before the control can be moved. A past center lock incorporated
in the actuating linkage holds the nap when it is in the retracted position so
that it may be used as a step on the right side. Since the nap will not support a
step load except in the fully retracted position, the naps should be retracted
when people are entering or leaving the airplane.
7.15 FUEL SYSTEM
Fuel is stored in two 55 gallon fuel tanks, one in each nacelle (Figure
7-13). One gallon of fuel in each nacelle is unusable, giving a total of 108
usable gallons. The minimum fuel grade is 100/130 octane. The fuel tank
vents, one installed under each wing, feature an anti-icing design to prevent
ice formation from blocking the fuel tank vent lines.
Normally, fuel is supplied to the engines through engine-driven fuel
pum'ps. Auxiliary electric fuel pumps serve as a back-up feature. The
electric fuel pumps are controlled by rocker switches on the switch panel to
the left of the pilot. The electric fuel pumps should be ON during takeoffs
and landings.
Fuel quantities and pressures are indicated on ga uges on the instrument
panel. There is a separate fuel quantity gauge for each tank. A calibrated fuel
dipstick is provided with the airplane. To visually check the quantity of fuel
in a tank, insert the dipstick to the bottom of the tank, close off the protruding end with a finger, withdraw the dipstick, and read the fuel level. The
most accurate'reading will be obtained with the airplane on level ground.
Fuel management controls are located on the console between the front
seats (Figure 7-11). There is a control lever for each of the engines, and each
is placarded "ON" - "OFF" - .. x FEED," During normal operation, the
levers are in the ON position, and each engine draws fuel from the tanks on
the same side as the engine. When the X FEED position is selected, the
engine will draw fuel from the tank on the opposite side in order to extend
range and keep fuel weight balanced during single-engine operation. The
REPORT: VB-860
7-14


SECTION 7
PA-44180, SEMINOLE
rr=====-
TO HEATER
COMBUSTION HEATER
FUEL PUMP
"
L FUEL
PRESS
GAUGE
"
R FUEL
PRESS
GAUGE
FUEL SELECTOR CONTROLS

L ENGINE R. ENGINE
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
X-FEED
X-FEED
ELECTRIC FUEL PUMP
R FUEL CELL
L FUEL CELL
I~FUELVENT
I
FUELVENT~
SCUPPER DRAIN
SCUPPER DRAIJ
FUEL SYSTEM SCHEMATIC

Figure 7-13
REPORT: VB-860
7-15
SECTION 7
PA44i80. SEMINOLE
OFF position shuts off the fuel flow to that engine.
NOTE
When one engine is inoperative and the fuel
selector for the operating engine is on X FEED
the selector for the inoperative engine must be
in the OFF position. Do not operate with both
selectors on X FEED. Do not take off or land
with a selector on X FEED.
Before each flight, fuel must be drained from the low points in the fuel
system to ensure that any accumulation of moisture or sediment is removed
from the system. A fuel drain is provided for each half of the fuel system. The
fuel drains are located on the right side of the fuselage just forward of the
entrance step. (Refer to fuel draining procedure in paragraph 8.21, Fuel
System.)
7.17 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

The electrical system is capable of supplying sufficient current for
complete night IFR equipment. Electrical power is supplied by two 60
ampere alternators (Figure 7-15), one mounted on each engine. A 35 amperehour, 12-volt battery provides current for starting, for use of electrical
equipment when the engines are not running, and for a source of stored
electrical power to back up the alternator output. The battery, which is
located in the nose section is normally kept charged by the alternators. If it
becomes necessary to charge the battery, it should be removed from the
airplane.
Two solid state voltage regulators maintain effective load sharing while
regulating electrical system bus voltage to 14-volts. An overvoltage relay in
each alternator circuit prevents damage to electrical and avionics equipment
by taking an alternator off the line if its output exceeds 17-volts. If this
should occur, the alternator light on the annunciator panel will illuminate.
Voltage regulators and overvoltage relays are located in the nose section.
REPORT: VB860
716


SECTION 7
DESCRIPTION &: OPERATION
PA-4+180, SEMINOLE
.. --m-----~
ALTERNATOR AND STARTER SCHEMATIC

Figure 1IS
REPORT: VB-S60
7-17
SECTION 7
DESCRIPTION" OPERATION
PA-4....180, SEMINOL~
-7)
/'
--TYPICAL CIRCUIT BREAKER PANEL

Figure 1-11
REPORT: VB-860
7-18


SECTION 1
PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
DESCRIPTION & OPERAnON
The electrical system and equipment are protected by circuit breakers
located on a circuit breaker panel on the lower right side of the instrument
panel (Figure 7-17). The circuit breaker panel is provided with enough olank
spaces to accommodate additional circuit breakers if extra electrical equipment is installed. In the event of equipment malfunctions or a sudden surge
of current, a circuit breaker can trip automatically. The pilot can reset the
breaker by pressing it in (preferably after a few minutes cooling period). The
circuit breakers can be pulled out manually.
Most of the electrical switches, including the master switch and switches
for magnetos, fuel pumps. starters. alternators. lights and pitot heat. are
conveniently located on the switch panel (Figure 7-19) to the left of the pilot.
An optional light, mounted in the overhead panel. provides instrument and cockpit lighting for night flying. The light is controlled by a
rheostat switch located adjacent to the light. A map light window in the
lens is actuated by an adjacent switch.
WARNING
Anti-collision lights should not be operating
when flying through cloud. fog or haze, since
the reflected light can produce spatial disorientation. Strobe lights should not be used in
close proximity to the ground, such as during
taxiing, takeoff or landing.
Approximately 2000 RPM or more is required to obtain full alternator
output of 60 amperes. It is normal to have zero output at idle RPM. This is
due to the reduced drive ratio from the engine. Dual ammeters and the ALT
annunciator light provide a means of monitoring the electrical system
operation. The two ammeters (load meters) indicate the output of the alternators. Should an ammeter indicate a load much higher than the known
consumption of the electrical equipment in use, it should be suspected of a
malfunction and turned off. In this event, the remaining alternator's
ammeter should show a normal indication after approximately one minute.
If both ammeters indicate a load much higher than the known consumption
for more than approximately five minutes, an electrical defect other than the
alternator system should be suspected because a discharged battery will
reduce the alternator load as it approaches the charged conditions. A zero
ammeter reading indicates an alternator is not producing current and should
be accompanied by illumination of the ALT annunciator light. A single

REPORT: VB-860
1-19
SECTION 7
PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
TYPICAL SWITCH PANEL

Figure 7-19
REPORT: VB-860
720


SECTION 7
PA-44J80, SEMINOLE
alternator is capable of supporting a continued flight in case of alternator or
engine failure in most conditions, however, with deicing equipment and
other high loads. care must be exercised to prevent the loads from exceeding
the 60 ampere rating and subsequent depletion of the battery. For abnormal
ami! or emergency operations and procedures, refer to Section J - Emergency Procedures.
An optional starting installation known as Piper External Power(PEP)
is accessible through a receptacle located on the lower left side of the nose
section. An external battery can be connected to the socket, thus allowing
the operator to crank the engine without having to gain access to the
airplane's battery.
CAUTION
Do not use cigar lighter receptacles as power

sources for any devices other than the cigar
lighters supplied with the airplane. A ny other
device plugged into these receptacles may be
damaged.
7.19 VACUUM SYSTEM

The vacuum system operates the air-driven gyro instruments The
vacuum system (Figure 7-21) consists of a vacuum pump on each engine,
plus plumbing and regulating equipment.
The vacuum pumps are dry-type pumps, which eliminates the need for
an air/ oil separator and its plumbing. A sheard rive protects the engine from
damage. If the drive shears, the gyros will become inoperative.
The vacuum gauge. mounted on the right instrument panel to the right
of the radios (refer to Figure 7-25), provides valuable information 10 the
pilot about the operation of the vacuum system. A decrease in pressure in a
S'istem that has remained constant over an extended period may indicate a
dirty filter, dirty screens. possibly a stick ing vacuum regulator or leak in
system (a low vacuum indicator light is provided in the annunciator panel).
Zero pressure would indicate a sheared pump drive, defective pump,
possibly a defective gauge or collapsed line. In t he event of any gauge
variation from the norm, the pilot should have a mechanic check the system
to prevent possible damage to the system components or eventual failure of
the system.

REPORT: VB-860
7-21
SECTION 7
PA-44-180. SEMINOLE
/'
J/
I
/
-,
1 PUMP
2 REGULATOR
3 VACUUM GAUGE
.. ATIITUDE GYRO
6 DIREcnONAL GYRO
6 CHECK VALVE
7 FILTER
VACUUM SYSTEM
Figure 7-21
REPORT: VB-860
7~22

SECTION 7
PA44180, SEMINOLE
A vacuum regulator is provided in the system to protect the gyros. The
valve is set so the normal vacuum reads 4.8 to 5.2 inches of mercury, a setting
which provides sufficient vacuum to operate all the gyros at their rated
RPM. Higher settings will damage the gyros and with a low setting the gyros
will be unreliable. The regulator is located behind the instrument panel.
7.21 PITOT STATIC SYSTEM
The pitot static system (Figure 7-23) supplie~ both pitot and static
pressure for the airspeed indicator and static pressure for the altimeter and
vertical speed indicator (when installed). Pitot and static pressure are picked
up by the pitot head on the bottom of the left wing.
The control valve for an alternate static source is located below the left
side of the instrument panel. When the valve is set in the alternate position,
the altimeter, vertical speed indicator and airspeed indicator will be using
cabin air for static pressure. The storm window and cabin vents must be
closed and the cabin heater and defroster must be on during alternate static
source operation. The altimeter error is less than 50 feet unless otherwise
placarded.
To prevent bugs and water from entering the pitot and static pressure
holes when the airplane is parked, a cover should be placed over the pitot
head. A partially or completely blocked pitot head will give erratic or zero
readings on the instruments.
NOTE
During preflight, check to make sure the pitot
cover is removed.
An optional heated pitot head installation, which alleviates problems
with icing or heavy rain, is available. The switch for pitot heat is located on
the switch panel to the pilot's left. The pitot heat system has a separate circuit
breaker located in the circuit breaker panel and labeled "Pitot Heat." The
operational status of the pitot heat system should be included in the preflight
check.
REPORT: VB860
723
SECTION 7
PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
/
!
\
/
'--_\
PITOT STATIC SYSTEM

Figure 7-23
REPORT: VB-860
7-24

SECTION 7
PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
CAUTION
Care should be exercised when checking the
operation of the heated pitot head. The unit
becomes very hot. Ground operation of pitot
heat should be limited to 3 minutes maximum
to avoid damaging the heating units.
7.23 INSTRUMENT PANEL
Flight instruments are grouped in the upper instrument panel (Figure
7-25); engine and electrical system monitoring instruments, the autopilot,
and the circuit breaker panel are in the lower instrument panel. Left and
right engine instruments are separated by the left control wheel shaft.
Radios are mounted in the center of the upper instrument panel. An
optional radio master switch is located near the top of the instrument panel
between the radio stacks. It controls the power to all radios through the
aircraft master switch. An emergency bus switch is also provided to insure
auxiliary power to the avionics bus in the event of a radio master switch
circuit failure. The emergency bus switch is located behind the lower right
shin guard left of the circuit breaker panel. The control quadrant - throttles
and propeller and mixture controls - is in the center of the lower instrument
panel. To the left of the control quadrant is the landing gear selector.
Various warning lights are located with the pilot's flight instruments on
the left upper instrument panel. The gear unsafe warning light is to the left of
the annunciator panel.
The annunciator panel, with oil pressure, gyro vacuum and alternator
lights, and incorporating a press-to-test feature, is located to the upper left
of the radios. The illumination of these lights in flight is an indication of a
possible system malfunction. The pilot should closely monitor instrument
panel gauges to check the condition of a system whose corresponding light
01\ the annunciator panel illuminates. During preflight, the operational
status of the annunciator panel should be tested by use of the press-to-test
button. When the button is depressed, all annunciator panel lights should
illuminate.
NOTE
When an engine is feathered, the alternator,

gyro air and engine oil pressure annunciator
lights will remain illuminated.
REPORT: VB860
725
-.1=
13
6 1
N~
15 16
14
11
O'JJ
:''''It'!'l
rJJ""J
""J""
_0
c:7'''':1
=-
=
~
"':12
:!-.I
:=,
~
o2
ac
c:7'
=:>
l1.'>
0<
.,
;>
;>
:""
:!
o
"'liZ
_. 'JJ
'2...,
rJJ
t'l'lU;
OrJJ
"
rJJ-
,...
t'l'l~
"':I
~
t'l'l~
::;>
:==
t'l'l""J
==
NN
J1'~
---.I
.c.c
ac
=:>ac
~=
-.J
"e
==
t'l'l
=
;>
N~
V>:""l
;;
""J
"':I
;>
"e=
;
I:'l'l
""J
==
I:'l'l
o"':I
."'f'j
t'!'l
18
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
, O.
19
24
20
ADF
CLOCK
TURN COORDINATOR
AIRSPEED INDICATOR
DIRECTIONAL GYRO
GEAR UNSAFE WARNING LIGHT
ATIITUDE GYRO
VERTICAL SPEED INDICATOR
ALT'METER
ANN UNCi'"TOR TEST SWITCH
11
12
13.
14
15.
16.
17.
1B.
19.
20.
25 26
2128 29 30
ANNUNCIATOR DISPLAY
RADAR ALTIMETER
NAV 2
AVIONICS
HOURMETER
VACUUM GAUGE
CIGAR LIGHTER
LEFT ENGINE GAUGES
MIKE/PHONE JACKS
AUTOPILOT CONTROLS
31
21
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
2B.
.lB.
30.
323"3 34
35 36 31
NAV SELECTOR
COUPLER
ELECTRIC PITCH
DUAL MANIFOLD PRESSURE GAUGE
DUAL TACHOMETER
PARKING BRAKE KNOB
EMERGENCY GEAR EXTENDER
LANDING GEAR SELECTOR
RIGHT ENGINE GAUGES
CARBURETOR HEAT CONTROLS
30
31
32.
33.
34.
35.
36.
37.
38
39.
39
CONTROL LEVERS
AMMETERS
CONTROL FRICTION LOCK
UGHT DIMMER SWITCHES
DUAL EGT GAUGE
EMERGENCY 8US SWITCH
RADIO MASTER SWITCH
CIRCUIT BREAKER PANEL
CLIMATE CONTROL PANEL
t~
':"""J
acO
?=
rJJ"e
I:'l'lO
::=
->
Z~
0-
~O
t'!'lZ

SECTION 7
PA~44-180, SEMINOLE
DESCRIPTION &: OPERATION
Instrument panel lighting can be dimmed or brightened by rheostat
switches to the right of the control quadrant. Back-lights and a red flood
light are optional equipment. When instrument panel iights are turned on,
annunciator lights are dimmed. However, they will not show dim when the
press-to-test swich is depressed.
7.25 HEATING, VENTILATING AND DEFROSTING SYSTEM
Heated air for cabin heat and windshield defrosting is provided by a
lanitrol combustion heater located in the forward fuselage (refer to Figure
7-27). Air from the heater is distributed by a manifold to the ducts along the
cabin floor to outlets at each seat and to the defroster outlets.
Operation of the combustion heater is controlled by a three-position
switch located on the instrument panel (Figure 7-29) and labeled FAN, OFF
and HEATER. Airflow and temperature are regulated by the three levers on
the instrument panel. The upper lever regulates air intake and the center
lever regulates cabin temperature. Cabin comfort can be maintained as
desired through various combinations of lever positions. Passengers have
secondary control over heat output by individually adjustable outlets at
each seat location. The third lever on the instrument panel controls the
windshield defrosters.
For cabin heat, the air intake lever on the instrument panel must be
partially or fully open and the three-position switch set to the HEATER
position. This simultaneously starts fuel flow and ignites the heater; and,
during ground operation, it also activates the ventilation blower which is an
integral part of the combustion heater. With instant starting and no need for
priming, heat should be felt within a few seconds. When cabin air reaches the
temperature selected on the cabin temperature lever, ignition of the heater
cycles automatically to maintain the selected temperature. Two safety
switches activated by the intake valve and located aft of the heater unit
prevent both fan and heater operation when the air intake lever is in the
closed position. A micro switch, which actuates when the landing gear is
retracted, turns off the ventilation blower so that in flight the cabin air is
circulated by ram air pressure only.
When the three-position switch is in the FAN position during ground
operation, the ventilation fan blows fresh air through the heater duct work
for cabin ventilation and windshield defogging when heat is not desired.

REPORT: VB-860
7~27
SECTION 7
PA44180, SEMINOLE
a::
;(
_ W
u
a::
a::
W ::>
u 0
a:: <1J
::> a::
o 0
<1J
...
ffi ~
~ W~
:>:
>
CABIN HEATING, VENTILATING AND DEFROSTING SYSTEM

Figure 7-27
REPORT: VB860
7-28


SECTION 7
PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
HEATING, VENTILATING & DEFROSTING CONTROL CONSOLE

Figure 7-29
.
REPORT: VB-860
7-29
SECTION 7
PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
To introduce fresh, unheated air into the cabin during flight, the air
intake should be open and the heater off. Ram air enters the system and can
be individually regulated at each floor outlet. Overhead outlets also supply
fresh air for cabin ventilation. The occupant of each seat can manually adjust
an outlet in the ceiling to regulate the flow of fresh air to that seat area. An
optional fresh air blower may be installed in the overhead ventilation system
to provide additional fresh air flow during ground operation.
An overheat switch located in the heater unit acts as a safety device to
render the heater inoperative if a malfunction should occur. Should the
switch deactivate the heater, the OVERHEAT light on the instrument panel
will illuminate The overheat switch is located on the aft inboard end of the
heater vent jacket. The red reset button is located on the heater shroud in the
nose cone compartment.
To prevent activation of the overheat switch upon normal heater
shutdown during ground operation, turn the three-position switch to FAN
for two minutes with the air intake lever in the open position before turning
the switch to OFF. During flight, leave the air intake lever open for a
minimum of fifteen seconds after turning the switch to OFF.
The combustion heater uses fuel from the airplane fuel system. An
electric fuel pump draws fuel from the left tank at a rate of approximately
one-half gallon per hour. Fuel used for heater operation should be
considered when planning for a flight.
7.27 CABIN FEATURES
The front seats are adjustable fore and aft. Each seat reclines and is
provided with an armrest. The rear seats are easily removed to provide
additional cargo space.
NOTE
To remove the rear scats, depress the plunger
behind each front leg and slide seat to rear.
Scat belts are standard on all seats, and the front seats are equipped with
adjustable shoulder harnesses. These shoulder harnesses are optionally
available for the two rear seats. The shoulder harness is routed over the
shoulder adjacent to the window and attached to the seat belt in the general
area of the occupant's inboard hip Adjust this fixed strap so that all controls
are accessible while maintaining adequate restraint for the occupant.
REPORT: VB-860
7-30


SECTION 7
PA-44-J80, SEMINOLE
--EMERGENCY EXIT
Figure 7-31
Shoulder harnesses with inertial reels are availablefor all four seats. A check
of the inertial reel mechanism is made by pulling sharply on the strap. The
reel should lock in place and prevent the strap from extending. For normal
body movements, the strap will extend or retract as required. Other seat
options include headrests and push-button, vertically adjustable pilot and
copilot seats. The seat belt should be snugly fastened over each unoccupied
seat.
Standard cabin features include a pilot's storm window, ashtrays, map
pockets, sun visors, and pockets on the front seat backs. Among the options
which may be added to suit individual needs are headrests. a fire extingltisher, and a special cabin sound-proofing package.
The pilot's left side window is an emergency exit. The emergency exit
release handle is located beneath the thermoplastic cover on the vertical post
between the first and second left side windows (Figure 7-31).

REPORT: VB-860
7-31
SECTION 7
PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
CAUTION
The emergency exit is for ground use only.
When released, the window will fall free from
the fuselage
7.29 STALL WARNING

An approaching stall is indicated by a stall warning horn which is
activated between five and ten knots above stall speed Mild airframe
buffeting and gentle pitching may also precede the stall Stall speeds are
shown on a graph in the Performance Charts Section. The stall warning
indication consists of a continuous sounding horn located behind the instrument panel. The stall warning horn has a different sound Irom that of the
gear warning horn which has a 90 cycles per minute beeping sound. The stall
warning horn is act iva ted by two lift detectors on the leading edge of the left
wing, outboard of the engine nacelle The inboard detector activatcs the
horn when the flaps are in the 25 and 40 degree positions, the outboard whcn
thc flaps arc in other positions A squat switch in the stall warning system
does not allow the units to be activated on the ground.
7.31 BAGGAGE AREA

The 24 cubic loot baggage compartment, located aft of the seats, has a
weight capacity of 200 pounds This compartment is loaded and unloaded
through a separate 22 x 20 inch baggage door, and it is accessible during
flight. Tic-down straps are provided and 1hey should be used at a II times The
baggage compartment and passenger doors use the samc key.
NOTE
11 is the pilot's responsibility to be sure when
baggage is loaded that the airplane C G falls
within the allowable e.G. range (See Weight
and Balance Section.)
7.33 FINISH
OJ he standard exterior finish is painted with acrylic lacquer An optional
polyurethane finish is also available To keep the finish attractive, economy
SilC spray cans of touch-up paint are available from Piper Dealers
REPORT: VB860
732


SECTION 7
PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
7.35 EMERGENCY LOCATOR TRANSMITTER*
The Emergency Locator Transmitter (ELT) meets the requirements of
FAR 91.52. It operates on self-contained batteries and is located in the aft
fuselage section. It is accessible through a rectangular cover on the right
hand side. A number 2 Phillips screwdriver is required to remove the cover.
A battery replacement date is marked on the transmitter. To comply
with FAA regulations, the battery must be replaced on or before this date
fhe battery must also be replaced if the transmitter has been used in an
emergency situation or if the accumulated test time exceeds one hour. or if
the unit has been inadvertently activated for an undetermined time period.
NOTE
If for any reason a test transmission is
necessary, the test transmission should be
conducted only in the first five minutes of any
hour and limited to three audio sweeps. If tests
must be made at any other time. the tests should
be coordinated with the nearest FAA tower or
flight service station.
NARCO ELT 10 OPERATION
On the ELT unit itself is a three position switch placarded "ON .....OFF..
and "ARM," The ARM position sets the ELT so that it will transmit after
impact and will continue to transmit until its battery is drained. The ARM
position is selected when the ELT is installed in the airplane and it should
remain in that position.
To use the ELTas a portable unit in an emergency, remove the cover and
unlatch the unit from its mounting base. The antenna cable is disconnected
by a left quarter-turn of the knurled nut and a pull. A sharp tug on the two
slnall wires will break them loose. Deploy the self-contained antenna by
pulling the plastic tab marked "PULL FULLY TO EXTEND ANTENNA."
Move the switch to ON to activate the transmitter.
"'Optional equipment
ISSlJED: MARCH 23, 1978
REPORT: VB860
733
SECTION 7
DESCRIPTION
&,

OPERATION
PA-44-t80, SEMINOLE
In the event the transmitter is activated by an impact, it can only be

turned off by moving the switch on the ELT unit to OFF. Normal operation
can then be restored by pressing the small clear plastic reset button located
on the top of the front face of the ELTand then moving the switch to ARM.
A pilot's remote switch located on the left side panel is provided to allow
the transmitter to be turned on from inside the cabin. The pilot's remote
switch is placarded "ON" and "ARMED." The switch is normally in the
ARMED position. Moving the switch to ON will activate the transmitter.
Moving the switch back to the ARMED position will turn off the
transmitter only if the impact switch has not been activated.
The ELT should be checked to make certain the unit has not been
activated during the ground check. Check by selecting 121.50 MHz on an
operating receiver. If there is an oscillating chirping sound, the ELT may
have been activated and should be turned off immediately. This requires
removal of the access cover and moving the switch to OFF, then press the
reset button and return the switch to ARM. Recheck with the receiver to
ascertain the transmitter is silent.
CCC CIR 11-2 OPERATION
On the unit itself is a three position selector switch placarded "OFF,"
"ARM" and "ON." The ARM position is provided to set the unit to the
automatic position so that it will transmit only after impact and will
continue to transmit until the battery is drained to depletion or until the
switch is manually moved to the OFF position. The ARM position is
selected when the transmitter is installed at the factory and the switch should
remain in that position whenever the unit is installed in the airplane. The ON
position is provided so the unit can be used as a portable transmitter or in the
event the automatic feature was not triggered by impact or to periodically
test the function of the transmitter.
Select the OFF position when changing the battery, when rearming the
unit if it has been activated for any reason, or to discontinue transmission.
NOTE
If the switch has been placed in the 0 N position
for any reason, the OFF position has to be
selected before selecting ARM. If ARM is
selected directly from the ON position, the unit
will continue to transmit in the ARM position.
REPORT: VB-860
7-34


SECTION 7
"A-44-180, SEMINOLE
A pilot's remote switch, located on the left side panel, is provided to
allow the transmitter to be controlled from inside the cabin. The pilot's
remote switch is placarded "ON,""AUTO/ ARM"and OFF/ RESET." The
switch is normally left in the AUTO/ ARM position. To turn the transmitter
off, move the switch momentarily to the OFF/RESET position. The
aircraft master switch must be ON to turn the transmitter OFF. To actuate
the transmitter for tests or other reasons, move the switch upward to the ON
position and leave it in that position as long as transmission is desired.
The unit is equipped with a portable antenna to !lllow the locator to be
removed from the aircraft in case of an emergency and used as a portable
signal transmitter.
The locator should be checked during the ground check to make certain
the unit has not been accidentally activated. Check by tuning a radio
receiver to 121.50 MHz. If there is an oscillating sound, the locator may have
been activated and should be turned off immediately. Reset to the ARM
position and check again to insure against outside interference.
ISSUED: DECEMBER IS, 1978

REPORT: VB-860
7-35
SECTION 7
PA-44-J80, SEMINOLE
7.37 PIPER EXTERNAL POWER
An optional starting installation known as Piper External Power (PEP)
allows the airplane engine to be started from an external battery without the
necessity of gaining access to the airplane battery. The cable from the
external battery can be attached to a receptacle under the right side of the
nose section of the fuselage. Instructions on a placard located on the cover of
the receptacle should be followed when starting with external power. For
instructions on the use of the PEP, refer to Starting Engines - Section 4
7.39 PROPELLER SYNCHROPHASER*
A propeller synchrophaser installation is available as optional equipment. Its function is to maintain both propellers at the same RPM and at a
preselected phase angle. This eliminates the propeller "beat" effect and
minimizes vibration. When the synchrophaser is installed, the left engine is
established as the master engine, and the right engine is equipped with a slave
governor which automatically maintains its RPM with the left engine RPM.
When the propeller synchrophaser is installed, a two-position switch is
located on the throttle quadrant below the propeller controls. It is labeled
"MANUAL" for manual control or standby and "AUTO SYNC" for
propeller synchrophaser.
During taxi, takeoff, landing or single engine operations the propeller
synchrophaser switch should be in the MANUAL position. During cruise,
propellers should be synchronized manually to within approximately 10
RPM and the switch placed in the AUTO SYNC position. Normally,
propeller synchrophasing will take place within a few seconds, but occasionally it may take up to a full minute. When the power setting is to be
changed, the synchrophaser switch should be set to MANUAL for 30
seconds before the power setting is adjusted; then the synchrophaser switch
may be returned to the AUTO SYNC position. If the propeller RPM
differential exceeds 50 RPM, the switch should be placed on MANUAL for
30 to 40 seconds; then the propellers can be synchronized again and the
synchrophaser switch returned to A UTO SYNC. Pulling the circuit breakers
completely deactivates the propeller synchrophaser system. If the master
switch is turned OFF or if there is an electrical system failure, the slave
engine will return to the controlled, selected RPM plus approximately 25
RPM's "out of synchronization" regardless of the position of the synchrophaser switch.
"'Optional equipment
REPORT: VB-860
7-36
ISSUED: APRIL 13, J979

SECTION 7
PA-44180, SEMINOLE
7.41 CARBURETOR ICE DETECTION SYSTEM
A carburetor ice detection system is available as an option on this
airplane.
The system consists of a control box mounted on the instrument panel,
a probe sensor mounted in the carburetor and a red warning light 10 indicate
thl: presence of ice in the carburetor.
If ice is present, apply full carburetor heat. Refer to 3 37, Carburetor
Icing, in the emergency procedures.
To adjust the system for critical ice detection. first turn on the airplane's
master switch and then turn on the ice detection unit. Turn the sensitivity
knob fully counterclockwise causing the carb ice light to come on. Now_
rotate the sensitivity knob back (clockwise) until the ice light just goes out.
This establishes the critical setting.
WARNING
This instrument is approved as optional equipment only and Flight Operations should not be
predicated on its use.
REPORT: VB-860
737
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 8
AIRPLANE HANDLING. SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Paragraph
No.
8.1
8.3
8.5
8.7
8.9
8.11
8.13
8.15
8.17
8.19
8.21
8.23
8.25
8.27
8.29
8.31
8.33
Page
No.
General
.
Airplane Inspection Periods
.
Preventive Maintenance ...........................
Airplane Alterations ..............................
Ground Handling
.
Engine Induction Air Filters
.
Brake Service
.
Landing Gear Service
.
Propeller Service
.
Oil Requirements
.
Fuel System
.
Tire Inflation
.
Battery Service
.
Serial Number Plates
.
Lubrication
.
Cleaning
.
Winterization
.
8-1
8-2
8-3
8-4
8-5
8-7
8-8
8-8
8-10
8-10
8-11
8-13
8-13
8-14
8-14
8-/4
8-17
REPORT: VB860
8-i

SECTION 8
PA44-180, SEMINOLE
HANDLING, SERV & MAINT
SECTION 8
AIRPI.ANE HANDUNG, SERVICING, AND MAINTENANCE
8.1 GENERAL
This section provides guidelines relating to the handling, servicing. and
maintenance of the Seminole For complete maintenance instructions, refer
to the PA-44-180 Maintenance Manual.
Every owner should stay in close contact with an authoriled Piper
Service Center or Piper's Customer Service Department to obtain the latest
information pertaining to their airplane, and to avail himself of Piper
Aircraft's support systems
Piper Aircraft Corporation takes a continuing interest in having the
owner get the most efficient use from his airplane and keeping it in the best
mechanical condition Consequently. Piper Aircraft. from time to time.
issues service releases including Service Bulletins. Service I.etters. Service
Spares Letters. and others relating to the aircraft.
Service Bulletins are of special importance and Piper considers
compliance mandatory These are sent directly to the latest FAA-registered
owners in the United States (U.S.) and Piper Service Centers worldwide
Depending on the nature of the release. material and labor allowances may
apply. This information is provided to all authoriled Service Centers
Service Letters deal with product improvements and servicing
techniques pertaining to the airplane. They are sent to Piper Service Centers
and. if necessary. to the latest FAA-registered owners in the lJ S Owners
should give careful attention to Service Letter information
Service Spares Letters offer improved parts. kits. and optional
equipment which were not available originally and which may be of interest
to the owner
ISSlJED: MARCH 23, 1978

REPORT: VB860
81

SECTION 8
PA44180, SEMINOLE
Piper Aircraft Corporation offers a subscription service for the Service
Bulletins, Service Letters, and Service Spares Letters. This service is
available to interested persons, such as owners, pilots, and mechanics at a
nominal fee, and may be obtained through an authorized Piper Service
Center or Piper's Customer Services Department.
Maintenance manuals, pa rts catalogs, and revisions to both, are
available from Piper Service Centers or Piper's Customer Services
Department.
Any correspondence regarding the airplane should include the airplane
model and serial number to ensure proper response.
8.3 AIRPLANE INSPECTION PERIODS
Piper Aircraft Corporation has developed inspection items and required
inspection intervals (i.e.: 50, 100,500, and 1000 hours) for the specific model
aircraft. Appropriate forms are contained in the applicable Piper
Service/ Maintenance Manual, and should be complied with by a properly
trained, knowledgeable, and qualified mechanic at a Piper Authorized
Service Center or a reputable repair shop. Piper Aircraft Corporation
cannot accept responsibility for the continued airworthiness of any aircraft
not maintained to these standards, and / or not brought into compliance with
applicable Service Bulletins issued by Piper Aircraft Corporation,
instructions issued by the engine, propeller, or accessory manufacturers, or
Airworthiness Directives issued by the FAA.
A programmed inspection, approved by the Federal Aviation
Administration (FAA), is also available to the owner. This involves routine
and detailed inspections to allow maximum utilization of the airplane.
Maintenance inspection costs are reduced, and the maximum standard of
continued airworthiness is maintained. Complete details are available from
Piper Aircraft Corporation.
In addition, but in conjunction with the above, the FAA requires
periodic inspections on all aircraft to keep the Airworthiness Certificate in
effect. The owner is responsible for assuring compliance with these
inspection requirements and for maintaining proper documentation in
logbooks and/ or maintenance records.
REPORT: VB860
8-2


SECTION 8
PA-44-180. SEMINOLE
A spectographic analysis of the engine oil is available from several
sources. This inspection, if performed properly, provides a good check ofthe
internal condition of the engine. To be accurate, induction air filters must be
cleaned or changed regularly, and oil samples must be taken and sent in at
regular intervals.
8.5 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
The holder of a Pilot Certificate issued under FAR Part 61 may perform
certain preventive maintenance described in FAR Part 43. This maintenance
may be performed only on an aircraft which the pilot owns or operates and
which is not used to carry persons or property for hire. Although such
maintenance is allowed by law, each individual should make a self-analysis
as to whether he has the ability to perform the work.
All other maintenance required on the airplane should be accomplished

by appropriately licensed personnel.
If maintenance is accomplished, an entry must be made

appropriate logbook. The entry should contain:
(a) The date the work was accomplished.
(b) Description of the work.
(c) Number of hours on the aircraft.
(d) The certificate number of pilot performing the work.
(e) Signature of the individual doing the work.

REVISED: MARCH 4. 1989
In
the
REPORT: VB-860
8-3
SECTION 8
PA44180, SEMINOLE
8.7 AIRPLANE ALTER:ATIONS
If the owner desires to have his aircraft modified, he must obtain FAA
approval for the alteration. Major alterations accomplished in accordance
with Advisory Circular 43 13-2, when performed by an A & P mechanic,
may be approved by the local FAA office Major alterations to the basic
airframe or systems not covered by AC 43.13-2 require a Supplemental Type
Certificate.
The owner or pilot is required to ascertain that the following Aircraft
Papers are in order and in the aircraft.
(a) To be displayed in the aircraft at all times:
(I) Aircraft Airworthiness Certificate Form FAA-8100-2
(2) Aircraft Registration Certificate Form FAA-80S0-3.
0) Aircraft Radio Station License if transmitters are installed
(b) To be carried in the aircraft at all times.
( I) Pilot's Operating Handbook
(2) Weight and Balance data plus a eopyo! the latest Repair
and Alteration Form FAA-337. if applicable.
(3) Aircraft equipment list.
Although the aircraft and engine logbooks are not required to be in the
aircraft. they should be made available upon request. Logbooks should be
complete and up to date. Good records will reduce maintenance cost by
giving the mechanic information about what has or has not been
accomplished
REPORT: VB-860
84


SECTION II
PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
8.9 GROUND HANDLING
(a) Towing
The airplane may be moved on the ground by the use of the nose
wheel steering bar that is stowed in the baggage compartment or by
power equipment that will not damage or excessively strain the nose
gear steering assembly.
CAUTIONS
When towing with power equipment, do not

turn the nose gear beyond its steering radius in
either direction, as this will result in damage to
the nose gear and steering mechanism.
Do not tow the airplane when the controls are
secured.
In the event towing lines are necessary, ropes should be
attached to both main gear struts as high up on the tubes as possible.
Lines should be long enough to clear the nose and I or tail by not less
than fifteen feet, and a qualified person should ride in the pilot's seat
to maintain control by use of the brakes.
(b) Taxiing
Before attempting to taxi the airplane, ground personnel
should be instructed and approved by a qualified person authorized
by the owner. Engine starting and shut-down procedures as well as
taxi techniques should be covered. When it is ascertained that the
propeller back blast and taxi areas are clear, power should be
applied to start the taxi roll, and the following checks should be
performed:
(I) Taxi a few feet forward and apply the brakes to determine
their effectiveness.
(2) Taxi with the propeller set in low pitch, high RPM setting.
(3) While taxiing, make slight turns to ascertain the effectiveness of the steering.
(4) Observe wing clearance when taxiing near buildings or
other stationary objects. If possible, station an observer
outside the airplane.
(5) When taxiing over uneven ground, avoid holes and ruts.
REPORT: VB-860
85
SECTION 8
PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
(6) Do not operate the engine at high RPM when running up
or taxiing over ground containing loose stones, gravel, or
any loose material that may cause damage to the propeller
blades.
(c) Parking
When parking the airplane, be sure that it is sufficiently
protected from adverse weather conditions and that it presents no
danger to other aircraft. When parking the airplane for /lny length
of time or overnight, it is suggested that it be moored securely.
(1) To park the airplane, head it into the wind if possible.
(2) Set the parking brake by depressing the toe brakes and
pulling out the parking brake control. To release the
parking brake, depress the toe brakes and push in the
parking brake control, then release the toe brakes.
CAUTION
Care should be taken when setting brakes that

are overheated or during cold weather when
accumulated moisture may freeze a brake.
(3) Aileron and stabilator controls should be secured with the
front seat belt and chocks used to properly block the
wheels.
(d) Mooring
The airplane should be moored for immovability, security and
and protection. The following procedures should be used for the
proper mooring of the airplane:
(1) Head the airplane into the wind if possible.
(2) Retract the flaps.
(3) Immobilize the ailerons and stabilator by looping the seat
belt through the control wheel and pulling it snug.
(4) Block the wheels.
(5) Secure tie-down ropes to the wing tie-down rings and to the
tail skid at approximately 45 degree angles to the ground.
When using rope of non-synthetic material, leave sufficient
slack to avoid damage to the airplane should the ropes
contract.
REPORT: VB-860
8-6

SECTION 8
HANDLING, SERV &: MAINT
PA-44-UiO, SEMINOLE
CAUTION
Use bowline knots, square knots or locked slip
knots. Do not use plain slip knots.
NOTE
Additional preparations for high winds include
using tie-down ropes from the landing gear
forks and securing the rudder.
(6) Install a pitot head cover if available. Be sure to remove the
pitot head cover before flight.
(7) Cabin and baggage doors should be locked when the
airplane is unattended.
8.U ENGINE INDUCTION AIR FILTERS

(a) Removing Induction Air Filter
(I) Remove the upper cowling to gain access to the air filter
box.
(2) Turn the three studs and remove the air filter box cover.
(3) Lift the air filter from the filter box.
(b) Cleaning Induction Air Filters
The induction air filters must be cleaned at least once every 50
hours, and more often, even daily, when operating in dusty
conditions. Extra filters are inexpensive, and a spare should be kept
on hand for use as a rapid replacement.
To clean the filter:
(I) Tap filter gently to remove dirt particles. Do not use
compressed air or cleaning solvents.
(2) Inspect filter. If paper element is torn or ruptured or gasket
is damaged, the filter should be replaced. The usable life of
the filter should be restricted to one year or 500 hours,
whichever comes first.
REPORT: VB-1I60
8-7
SECTION 1
PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
(c) Installation of Induction Air Filters
After cleaning. place filter in air box and install cover. Secure
cover by turning studs. Replace cowl.
11.13 BRAKE SERVICE
The brake system is filled with MIL-H-S606 (petroleum base) hydrau!ic

brake fluid. This should be checked periodically or at every SO-hour
inspection and replenished when necessary. The brake reservoir is located in
the forward maintenance area. Remove the four screws and rotate the
fiberglass nose cone forward and down. The reservoir is located at the top
rear of the compartment Keep the fluid level at the level marked on the
reservoir.
No adjustment of brake clearance is necessary. Refer to the Service
Manual for brake lining replacement instructions.
1.15 LANDING GEAR SERVICE
Two jack points are provided for jacking the aircraft for servicing. One
is located outboard of each main landing gear. Before jacking. attach a tail
support to the tail skid. Approximately 500 pounds of ballast should be
placed on the tail support.
CAUTION
Be sure to apply sufficient support ballast;

otherwise the airplane may tip forward. and the
nose section could be damaged.
Landing gear oleos should be serviced according to instruction on the
units. Under normal static load (empty weight of airplane plus full fuel and
oil). main oleo struts should be exposed 2.60 inches and the nose oleo strut
should be exposed 2.70 inches. Refer to the Service Manual for complete
information on servicing oleo struts.
REPORT: VB-860
8-8

SECTION 8
PA-44I80, SEMINOtE
BRAKE SYSTEM
Figure 8-1
ISSllED: MARCH 23. 1978
REPORT: VB-860
8-9

SECTION 8
PA-44180, SEMINOLE
8.17 PROPELLER SERVICE

The gas charge in the propeller cylinder should be kept at the pressure
specified on the placard located in the spinner cap. The pressure in the
cylinder will increase a bout one-third psi for every degree Fahrenheit
increase in temperature. This effect should be considered when checking
pressure The charge maintained must be accurate and free of excessive
moisture since moisture may freeze the piston during cold weather. Dry
nitrogen gas is recommended
CHAMBER PRESSURE REQUIREMENTS WITH
TEMPERATURE FOR COUNTERWEIGHT TYPE PROPELLERS
Temp. OF
Pressure (PSI)
FOR PROPELLER HUBS.
HC-C2Y(K,R)-2CEUF, HC-C2Y(K,R)-2CLEUF,
HC-C3YK-2EUF AND HC-C3YK-2LEUF
70 to 100
40 to 70
o to 40
-30 to
0
41
+/- I
38 +/ - I
36 + 1- I
33 + / - I
NOTE. Do not check pressure or charge with propeller in feather position
The spinner and backing plate should be cleaned and inspected for
cracks frequently Before each night the propeller should be inspected for
nicks, scratches, or corrosion If found, they should be repaired as soon as
possible by a rated mechanic, since a nick or scratch causes an area of
increased stress which can lead to serious cracks or t he loss of a propeller tip.
The back face 01 the blades should be painted when necessary with flat black
paint to retard glare. To prevent corrosion, all surfaces should be cleaned
and waxed periodically'
8.19 OIL REQUIREMENTS

The oil capacity of the Lycoming engines is 6 quarts per engine with a
minimum safe quantity of 2 quarts per engine. It is necessary that oil be
maintained at full for maximum endurance flights It is recommended that
engine oil be drained and renewed every 50 hours. or sooner under
REPORT: VB860
8-10


SECTION 8
PA44180, SEMINOLE
unfavorable conditions. Full now cartridge type oil filters should be replaced
each 50 hours of operation. The interval between oil and oil filter change is
not to exceed four (4) months. lycoming Service Bulletin No. 446should be
complied with each 50 hours, also. The following grades are required for
temperatures:
A 'Jerage Ambient
Temperature
Mll-l-6082B
SAE Grade
M IL- L-2285 I
Ashless Dispersant
SAE Grades
60
50
40
30
20
15W-50 or 20W-50
60
40 or 50
40
30, 40 or 20W-40
30 or 20W-30
All Temperatures
Above 800 F
Above 600 F
300 F to 900 F
OaF to 700 F
Below lOaF
When operating temperatures overlap indicated ranges, use the lighter

grade oil.
NOTE
Refer to the latest issue of Lycoming Service
Instruction 1014 (lubricating Oil
Recommendations) for further information.
8.21 FUEL SYSTEM
(a) Servicing Fuel System
The fuel screens in the strainers require cleaning at 50 hour or
90 day intervals, whichever occurs first. The fuel gascolator
strainers are located in the fuselage under the rear seats. The fuel
selector valves and the auxiliary pumps are in the wings adjacent to
the nacelles.
(b) Fuel Requirements
The minimum aviation grade hl,~1 for the PA-44-180 is 100.
Since the use of lower grades can cause serious engine damage in a
short period of time, the engine warranty is invalidated by the use of
lower octanes.
Whenever 100 or tOOll grade fuel is not available, commercial
grade 100/130 should be used. (See Fuel Grade Comparison Chart.)
Refer to the latest issued of Lycoming Service Instruction No. 1070
for additional information.
REPORT: VB-860
8-U

SECTION 8
PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
A summary of current grades as well as the previous fuel
designations is shown in the following chart:
FUEL GRADE COMPARISON CHART
Previous Commercial
Fuel Grades (ASTM-D91O)
G rade
Color
Max TEL
mlllJ S gal
80/87
9 1/98
100/130
115/145
red
blue
green
purple
OS
20
30
46
Current Commercial
Fuel Grades (ASTM-D910-75)
Grade
Color
Max TEL
ml/U S gal
80
IOOll
100
none
red
blue
green
none
OS
20
"30
none
Current Military
Fuel Grades (MIL:G-SS72fl
Amendment No 3
Grade
Color
80187
none
100/130
IIS/145
red
none
green
purple
Max TEl
!'11/lJ S gal
OS
none
"30
46
- Grade 100l.l fuel in some overseas countries is currenllycolorcd green and designated as ''100l ..
- Commercial fuel grade 100 and grade 100/ UO (bolh of which are colored green) having TEL
content of up 10 4 mil U S gallon are approved for use in all engines certificated for use with
grade 100/130 luel
The operation of the aircraft is approved with an anti-icing

additive in the fuel. When an anti-icing additive is used it musl meet
the specification M IL-I-27686, must be uniformly blended with the
fuel while refueling, must not exceed .15% by volume of the refueled
quantity, and to ensure its effectiveness should be blended at not less
than .10% by volume. One and one half liquid ozs. per ten gallon of
fuel would fall within this range. A blender supplied by the additive
manufacturer-should be used. Except for the information contained
in this section. the manufacturer's mixing or blending instructions
should be carefully followed.
CAUTION
Assure that the additive is directed into the
flowing fuel stream The additive flow should
start after and stop before the fuel flow. Do not
permit the concentrated additive to come in
contact with the aircraft painted surfaces or the
interior surfaces of t he fuel tanks
REPORT: VB-860
8lIa

SECTION 8
PA44-180. SEMINOLE
HANDLING, SERVo & MAINT
CAUTIONS
Some fuels have anti-icing additives preblended in the fuel at the refinery, so no further
blending should be performed.
Fuel additive can not be used as a substitute for
preflight draining of the fuel system.
(c) Filling Fuel Tanks
Observe all safety precautions required when handling gasoline. Fill the fuel tanks through the fillers located inside the access
cover aft of the engine cowling on the outboard side of the nacelles.
Each nacelle tank holds a maximum of 55 U.S. gallons. When using
less than the standard 110 gallon capacity, fuel should be distributed
equally between each side.
REPORT: VB-860
8-Jlb
SECTION 8
HANDLING, SERV & MAlNT
PA44-180, SEMINOI,E
FUEL DRAINS
Figure 8-2
(d) Draining Fuel Strainers, Sumps and Lines
The aircraft is equipped with single point drains which should
be drained before the first flight of the day and after refueling, to
check for fuel contamination. If contamination is found, fuel should
be drained until the contamination stops. If contamination persists
after draining fuel for a minute, contact a mechanic to check the fuel
system.
Each half of the fuel system can be drained from a single point
which is located just forward of the entrance step. Fuel selectors
should be in the ON position during draining. The fuel drained
should be collected in a transparent container and examined lor
contamination.
CAUTION
When draining fuel, be sure that no fire hazard

exists before starting the engines.
REPORT: VB-860
8-12

SECTION 8
PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
(e) Draining Fuel System
The fuel may be drained by opening the valves at the right hand
side of the fuselage just forward of the entrance step or by
siphoning. The remaining fuel in the lines may be drained through
the gascolators.
8.23 TIRE INFLATION

For maximum service from the tires. keep them inflated to the proper
pressures. The main gear tires should be inOated to 55 psi and the nose gear
should be inOatcd to 50 psi.
Interchange the tires on the main wheels. if necessary. to produce even
wear. All wheels and tires are balanced before original installation. and the
relationship of the tire. tube. and wheel should be maintained if at all
possible. Unbalanced wheels can cause extreme vibration on takeoff. In the
installation of new components. it may be necessary to rebalance the wheel
with the tire mounted.
When checking the pressure, examine the tires for wear, cuts, bruises
and slippage.
8.25 BATTERY SERVICE

Access to the 12-volt 35 ampere hour battery is gained through the
fiberglass nose cone The battery container has a plastic drain tube which is
normally closed off. This tube should be opened occasionally to drain off
any accumulation of liquid
The battery fluid level must not be brought above the baffle plates. It
should be checked every 30 days to determine that the fluid level is proper
and the connections are tight and free of corrosion. DO NOT fill the battery
:,bove the baffle plates. DO NOT fill the battery with acid - use distilled water
only. A hydrometer check will determine the percent of charge in the battery.
If the battery is not properly charged. recharge it starting with a rate of 4
amperes and finishing with a rate of 2 amperes. Quick ch,lrges are not
recommended.
ISSllED: MARCH 23, 1978
REPORT: VB860
813
SECTION 8
PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
The external power receptacle, if installed, is located on the left side of
the nose section. Be sure the master switch is off while inserting or
removing a plug at this receptacle.
Refer to the Service Manual for detailed procedures for cleaning and
servicing the battery.
8.27 SERIAL NUMBER PLATES

The serial number plate is located on the bottom of the fuselage near the
aft end of the tail cone. The serial number should always be used when
referring to the airplane on service or warranty matters.
8.29 LUBRICATION
Lubrication at regular intervals is an essential part of the maintenance
of an airplane. For lubrication instructions and a chart showing lubrication
points, types of lubricants to be used, lubrication methods and recommended frequencies, refer to the Service Manual.
8.31 CLEANING
(a) Cleaning Engine Compartment
Before cleaning the engine compartment, place a strip of tape
on t he magneto vents to prevent any solvent from entering these
units.
(I) Place a large pan under the engine to catch waste.
(2) With the engine cowling removed, spray or brush the
engine'with solvent or a mixture of solvent and degreaser
I n order to remove especially heavy dirt and grease
deposits, it may be necessary to brush areas that weI e
sprayed.
CAUTION
Do not spray solvent into the alternator, vaccuum pump, starter, air intakes, or alternate air
inlets
REPORT: VB-860
8-14

SECTION 8
PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
HANDLING, SEaV' " MAINT
(3) Allow the solvent to remain on the engine from five to ten
minutes. Then rinse the engine clean with additional
solvent and allow it to dry.
CAUTION
Do not operate the engine until excess solvent

has evaporated or otherwise been removed.
(4) Remove the protective tape from ~he magnetos.
(5) Lubricate the controls, bearing surfaces, etc., in
accordance with the Lubrication Chart in the Service
Manual.
(b) Cleaning Landing Gear
Before cleaning the landing gear, place a plastic cover or similar
material over the wheel and brake assembly.
(I) Place a pan under the gear to catch waste.
(2) Spray or brush the gear area with solvent or a mixture of
solvent and degreaser, as desired. Where heavy grease and
dirt deposits have collected, it may be necessary to brush
areas that were sprayed, in order to clean them.
(3) Allow the solvent to remain on the gear from five to ten
minutes. Then rinse the gear with additional solvent and
allow to dry.
(4) Remove the cover from the wheel and remove the catch
pan.
(5) Lubricate the gear in accordance with the Lubrication
Chart in the Service Manual.
(6) Caution: Do not brush the micro switches.
(c) Cleaning Exterior Surfaces
The airplane should be washed with a mild soap and water.
Harsh abrasives or alkaline soaps or detergents could make
scratches on painted or plastic surfaces or could cause corrosion of
metal. Cover areas where cleaning solution could cause damage. To
wash the airplane, use the following procedure:
(I) Flush away loose dirt with water.
(2) Apply cleaning solution with a soft cloth, a sponge or a
soft bristle brush.
(3) To remove exhaust stains, allow the solution to remain on
the surface longer.
REPORT: V'B-86e
8-15
SECTION 8
PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
HANDLING, SE~V &. MAINT
(4) To remove stubborn oil and grease, use a cloth dampened
with naphtha.
(5) Rinse all surfaces thoroughly.
(6) Any good automotive wax may be used to preserve painted
surfaces. Soft cleaning cloths or a chamois should be used
to prevent scratches when cleaning or polishing. A heavier
coating of wax on the leading surfaces will reduce the
abrasion problems in these areas.
(d) Cleaning Windshield and Windows
(I) Remove dirt, mud and other loose particles from exterior
surfaces with clean water.

(2) Wash with mild soap and warm water or with aircraft
plastic cleaner. Use a soft cloth or sponge in a straight back
and forth motion. Do not rub harshly.
(3) Remove oil and grease with a cloth moistened with
kerosene.
CAUTION
Do not use gasoline, alcohol, benzene, carbon

tetrachoride, thinner, acetone, or window
cleaning sprays.
(4) After cleaning plastic surfaces, apply a thin coat of hard
polishing wax. Rub lightly with a soft cloth. Do not use a
circular motion.
(5) A severe scratch or mar in plastic can be removed by
rUbbing out the scratch with jeweler's rouge. Smooth both
sides and apply wax.
(e) Cleaning Headliner, Side Panels and Seats
(I) Clean headliner, side panels, and seats with a stiff brush,
and vacuum where necessary.
(2) Soiled upholstery, except leather, may be cleaned with a
good upholstery cleaner suitable for the material. Carefully
follow the manufacturer's instructions. Avoid soaking or
harsh rubbing.
REPORT: VB-860
8~16

SECTION 8
PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
HANDLING, SERV &, MAINT
CAUTION
Solvent cleaners require adequate ventilation.

(3) Leather should be cleaned with saddle soap or a mild hand
soap and water.
(1) Cleaning Carpets
To clean carpets, first remove loose dirt with a whisk broom or

vacuum. For soiled spots and stubborn stains use a noninflammable
dry cleaning fluid. Floor carpets may be removed and cleaned like
any household carpet.
8.33 WINTERIZATION
For winter operation a winterization kit is installed on the inlet opening
of the oil cooler outboard chamber of the plenum chamber. This kit should
be installed whenever the ambient temperature is 50 F or less. When the kit
is not being used it can be stowed in the nose cone compartment.
REPORT: VB-860
8-17
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 9
SUPPLEMENTS
Paragraph/ Supplement
No.
Page
No.
9.1
General .........................................
9-1
AutoControl I1IB Autopilot Installation

.
AltiMatic I1IC Autopilot InstaUation
.
Piper Electric Pitch Trim .................... " .. "
KNS 80 Navigation System
..
ANS 351 Area Navigation Computer
.
Air Conditioning Installation .......................
Century 21 Autopilot Instanation ..................
Century 4 t Autopilot Instanation ...................
Piper Control Wheel Clock InstaHation
.
.
RCA WeatherScout II Weather Radar System
RDR-160 Weather Radar System .................
RDR-160/IN-2026A Weather Radar System
.
RCA Color WeatherScout II Weather Radar System ..
Electrical Distribution Bus Modification .............
9-3
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
to
II
12
13
14
9-9
9-21.
9-23
9-27
9-31
9-37
9-41
9-53
9-55
9-61
9-67
9-73
9-79
REPORT: VB-860
9!

PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
SECTION 9
SUPPLEMENTS
SECTION 9
SUPPLEMENTS
9.1 GENERAL
This section provides information in the form of supplements which are
necessary for efficient operation of the airplane when it is equipped with one
or more of the various optional systems and equipment not approved with
the standard airplane.
All of the supplements provided in this section are "FAA Approved"
and consecutively numbered as a permanent part of this handbook. The
information contained in each supplement applies only when the related
equipment is installed in the airplane.
REPORT: VB-860
9-1
SECTION 9
SUPPLEMENTS

PA44180, SEMINOLE
REPORT: VB860
9Z

PA-44-UIO, SEMINOLE
SECTION 9
SUPPLEMENTS
SUPPLEMENT t
AUTOCONTROL IllS AUTOPILOT INSTALLATION
SECTION I - GENERAL
This supplement supplies information necessary for the operation of the
airplane when the optional Piper AutoControl IIIB Autopilot is installed.
The information contained within this supplement is to be used in
conjunction with the complete handbook.
This supplement has been "FAA Approved" as a permanent part ofthis
handbook based on EDO-AIRE Mitchell STC SA3276SW-D and must
remain in this handbook at all times when the optional Piper AutoControl
I1IB Autopilot is installed.
SECTION 2 LIMITATIONS
(a) Autopilot operation prohibited above 185 KIAS. (Autopilot Vmo)
(b) Autopilot must be "OFF" for takeoff and landing.
SECTlON.3 - EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
(a) In an emergency the AutoControl IIIB can be disconnected by
pushing the AP ON-OFF switch "OFF."
(b) The autopilot can be overpowered at either control wheel.
(c) An autopilot runaway, with a 3 second delay in the initiation of recovery while operating in climb, cruise or descending flight, could
result in a 580 bank and 190 foot altitude loss. Maximum altitude
loss measured at 185 KIAS in descent.
(d) An autopilot runaway, with a I second delay in the initiation of recovery during an approach operation, single or multi-engine,
coupled or uncoupled, could result in a 12" bank and 20 foot altitude loss.
REPORT: VB860
9-3
SECTION 9
SUPPLEMENTS

PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
(e) Emergency operation with optional NSD 360A (HSI) - Slaved

andlor Non-Slaved:
NSD 360A
(I) Appearance of HOG Flag:
Check air supply gauge (vac or pressure) for adequate air

supply (4 in; Hg. min.).
b. Check compass circuit breaker.
c. Observe display for proper operation.
(2) To disable heading card - pull circuit breaker and use magnetic
compass for directional data.
a.
NOTE
If heading card is not operational, autopilot
should not be used.
(3) With card disabled, VORl Localizer and Glide Slope displays
are still functional; use card set to rotate card to aircraft heading for correct picture.
(4) Slaving Failure - (Le. failure to self-correct for gyro drift):
a. Check gyro slaving switch is set to No. I position.
b. Check for HOG Flag.
c. Check compass circuit breaker.
d. Reset heading card while observing slaving meter.
NOTE
Dead slaving meter needle or needle displaced
fully one direction indicates a slaving system
failure.
e.
f.
g.
Select slaving amplifier No.2 (gyro slaving switch is set to

No.2 position).
Reset heading card while checking slaving meter.
Switch to free gyro mode and periodically set card as
unslaved gyro.
NOTE
In the localizer mode the "TO-FROM" arrows

may remain out of view, depending upon the
design of the NAV converter used in the
installation.
REPORT: VB860
9-4

PA-404-180, SEMINOLE
SECTION 9
SUPPLEMENTS
SECTION 4 - NORMAL PROCEDURES

PREFLIGHT
(a) AUTOPILOT
(I) Place radio coupler in HOG mode (if installed) and place the
AP "ON-OFF" switch to the "ON" position to engage roil
section. Rotate roll command knob left and right and observe
that control whe~1 describes a corresponding left and right tum,
then center knob.
(2) Set proper O.G. heading on D.G. and turn HOG bug to aircraft
heading. Engage HOG mode rocker switch and rotate HOG
bug right and left. Aircraft control wheel should tum same
direction as bug. Grasp control wheel and manually override
servo, both directions.
(b) RADIO COUPLER - (OPTIONAL)
(I) Tune and identify VOR or VOT station. Position radio coupler
to OMNI mode. Place autopilot and HOG switches to the ON
position. Set HOG bug to aircraft heading and rotate ODS to
cause OMNI indicator needle to swing left and right slowly.
Observe that control wheel rotates in direction of needle
movement.
(2) Disengage AP "ON-OFF" switch. Reset radio coupler control
to HOG.
IN-FLIGHT
(a) Trim airplane (ball centered).
(b) Check air pressure or vacuum to ascertain that the directional gyro
and attitude gyro are receiving sufficient air.
REPORT: VB-860
9-5
SECTION 9
SUPPLEMENTS

PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
(c) Roll Section

(I) To engage, center ROLL COMMAND knob, push AP "ONOFF" switch to "ON" position. To turn, rotate ROLL COMMAND knob in desired direction. (Maximum angle of bank
should not exceed 300 .)
(2) For heading mode, set directional gyro with magnetic compass.
Push directional gyro HOG knob in, rotate bug to aircraft
heading. Push console heading rocker (HOG) switch to "ON"
position. To select a new aircraft heading, push D.G. heading
knob "IN" and rotate, in desired direction of turn, to the
desired heading.
(d) Radio Coupling VOR-ILS with H.S.I. (Horizontal Situation Indicator) Type Instrument Display. (Optiomll)
(I) VOR Navigation
a. Tune and identify VOR station. Select desired course by
rotating CRS knob of H.S.I.
b. Select OMNI mode on radio coupler.
c. Select HOG mode on autopilot console to engage coupler.
Aircraft will tum to a 450 intercept angle to intercept the
selected VOR course. Intercept angle magnitude depends
on radio needle off course magnitude, 100% needle deflection will result in 450 intercept with the intercept angle
diminishing as the needle offset diminishes.
d. NAV mode - NAV mode provides reduced VORseusitivity
for tracking weak, or noisy VOR signals. NAV mode
should be selected after the aircraft is established on
course.
(2) ILS-LOC Front Course
a. Set inbound, front, localizer course with H.S. I. course
knob.
b. Select LOC-Normal on radio coupler to intercept and
track inbound on the localizer. Select LOC-REV to intercept and track the localizer course outbound to the procedure turn area.
c. Select HOG mode on autopilot console til engage coupler.
REPORT: VB-860
9-6

PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
SECTION 9
SUPPLEMENTS
(3) ILS - Back Course

a. Set inbound, front localizer course with H.S.I. course
knob.
b. Select LOC-REV on radio coupler to intercept and track
inbound on the back localizer course. Select LOC-NORM
to intercept and track outbound on the back course to the
procedure turn area.
(e) Radio Coupling - VORIILS with stand,ard directional gyro.
(Optional)
Radio coupler operation in conjunction with a standard directional
gyro and VORl LOC display differs from operation with an integrated display (H.S.I.) only in one respect. The HOG bug is used as
the radio course datum and therefore must be set to match the desired VOR course as selected on the OBS.
(I) For VOR intercepts and tracking:
Select the desired VOR course and setthe HOG bug to the same
heading. Select OMNI mode on the coupler and HOG mode on
the autopilot console.
(2) For ILS Front Course intercepts and tracking:
Tune the localizer frequency and place the HOG bug on the inbound, front course heading. Select LOC-NORM mode on the
coupler and HOG mode on the autopilot console.
(3) For LOC Back Course intercepts and tracking:
Tune the localizer frequency and place the HOG bug on the inbound course heading to the airport. Select LOC-REV mode
with coupler and HOG mode on the autopilot console.
SECTION 5 - PERFORMANCE
No changes to the basic performance provided by Section 5 of the Pilot's
Operating Handbook are necessary for this supplement.
REPORT: VB-860
9-1
SECTION 9
SUPPLEMENTS
PiPER AiRCRAFT CORPORAnON

PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
REPORT: VB-860
9-8

PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
SECTION 9
SUPPLEMENTS
SUPPLEMENT 2
ALTIMATIC
mc AUTOPILOT INSTALLATION
SECTION 1 - GENERAL
airplane when the optional AltiMatic mc Autopilot is installed. The
information contained within this supplement is to be used in conjunction
with the complete handbook.
This supplement has been "FAA Approved" as a permanent part of this
handbook based on EDO-AIRE Mitchell STC SA3277SW-D and must
remain in this handbook at all times When the optional AltiMatic mc
Autopilot is installed.
SECTION 2 - LIMITATIONS
(a) Autopilot operation prohibited above 185 KIAS. (Autopilot Vmo)
(b) Autopilot must be "OFF" during takeoff and landing.
(c) Required placard PIN 13A660 "Conduct Trim Check prior to
flight (see AFM)" to be installed in clear view of pilot.
(d) During autopilot operation, the pilot must be in his seat with the
safety belt fastened.
REPORT: VB-160
9-9
SECTION 9
SUPPLEMENTS

PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
SECTION 3 - EMERGENCY PROCEDURES

This aircraft is equipped with a Master Disconnect/Interrupt Switch on
the pilot's control wheel. When the switch button is depressed it will
disconnect the autopilot. When depressed and held it will interrupt all
Electric Elevator Trim Operations. Trim operations will be restored when
the switch is released. If an autopilot or trim emergency is encountered, do
not attempt to determine which system is at fault. Immediately depress and
hold the Master Disconnect/Interrupt button. Turn off autopilot and trim
master switch and retrim aircraft, then release the interrupt switch.
NOTE
During examination of this supplement, the
pilot is advised to locate and identify the
autopilot controls, the trim master switch and
circuit breaker for both systems.
(a) In the event of an autopilot malfunction the autopilot can be:
(I) Overpowered at either control wheel.
CAUTION
Do not overpower autopilot pitch axis for

periods longer than 3 seconds because the
autotrim system will operate in a direction to
oppose the pilot and will, thereby, cause an
increase in the pitch overpower forces.
(2) Disconnected by depressing the Master Disconnect/Interrupt
Switch.
(3) Disconnected by depressing the Trim Switch"AP OFF" bar.
(4) Disconnected by pushing the roll rocker switch "OFF."
REPORT: VB-860
9-10

PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
SECTION 9
SUPPLEMENTS
(b) In the event of a trim malfunction:

(I) Depress and hold the Master Trim Interrupt Switch.
(2) Trim Master Switch - "OFF." Retrim aircraft as necessary
using manual trim system.
(3) Release Master Interrupt Switch - be alert for possible trim
action.
(4) Trim Circuit Breaker - Pull. Do not operate trim until problem
is corrected.
(5) If the trim system operates only in one direction, pull the circuit
breaker and do not operate the trim system until corrective
action is taken. Monitor autopilot operation closely when
operating without trim follow-up.
(c) If a trim runaway occurs with the autopilot operating, the above
procedure will disconnect the autopilot which will immediately result in higher control wheel forces. Be prepared to manually retrim,
as necessary to eliminate undesirable forces.
(d) Altitude Loss During Malfunction:
(I) An autopilot malfunction during climb, cruise or descent with
a 3 second delay in recovery initiation could result in as much as
580 of bank and 300' of altitude loss. Maximum altitude loss
measured in a descent at Vmo.
(2) An autopilot malfunction during an approach with a I second
delay in recovery initiation could result in as much as 120 of
bank and 60' altitude loss. Maximum altitude loss measured in
approach configuration gear down and operating either coupled or uncoupled, single or multi-engine.
(e) Emergency Operation With Optional NSD 360A (HSI) - Slaved
and/or Non-Slaved:
NSD 360A
(I) Appearance of HOG Flag:
a.
b.
c.
Check air supply gauge (vac or pressure) for adequate air

supply (4 in. Hg. min.).
Check compass circuit breaker.
Observe display for proper operation.
REPORT: VB-8Ito
9-11
SEcnON 9
SUPPLEMENTS

PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
(2) To disable heading card - pull circuit breaker and use magnetic
compass for directional data.
NOTE
should not be used.
(3) With card disabled, VORl Localizer and Glide Slope displays
are still functional; use card set to rotate card to aircraft heading for correct picture.
(4) Slaving Failure - (i.e. failure to self-correct for gyro drift):
a. Check gyro slaving switch is set to No. I position.
b. Check for HDG Flag.
c. Check compass circuit breaker.
d. Reset heading card while observing slaving meter.
NOTE
Dead slaving meter needle or a needle displaced
failure.
e.
f.
g.
Select slaving amplifier No.2 (gyro slaving switch is set to

No.2 position).
Reset heading card while checking slaving meter.
Switch to free gyro and periodically set card as unslaved
gyro.
NOTE
In the localizer mode the "TO-FROM" arrows

installation.
REPORT: VB-860
9-12

PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
SECTION 9
SUPPLEMENTS
(I) Single Engine Operations:

(I) Engine failure during an autopilot approach operation: Dis-
engage autopilot; conduct remainder of approach manually.

(2) Engine failure during go-around: Disengage autopilot, retrim
aircraft, perform normal aircraft engine out procedures; then
re-engage autopilot.
(3) Engine failure during normal climb, cruise, descent: Retrim
aircraft, perform normal aircraft engine out procedures.
(4) Maintain aircraft yaw trim throughout all single engine operations.
PREFLIGHT INSPECTION - AUTOPILOT
(a) Roll Section
(I) Place Radio Coupler in "Heading" mode and place roll rocker
switch "ON" to engage roll section. Rotate roll command knob
left and right and observe that control wheel describes a corresponding left and right turn, then center knob.
(2) Set proper D.G. Heading on D.G. and turn Heading Bug to aircraft heading. Engage "Heading" mode rocker switch and rotate heading bug right and left. Aircraft control wheel should
turn same direction as bug. Grasp control wheel and manually
override servo, both directions.
(3) Disengage autopilot by depressing trim switch. Check aileron
operation is free and autopilot is disconnected from controls.
(b) Pitch Section
(I) Engage "Roll" rocker switch.
(2) Center pitch command disc and engage "Pitch" rocker switch.
(3) Rotate pitch command disc full UP and full DOWN and check
that control wheel moves same direction. Check to see that
servo can be overriden by hand at control wheel.
NOTE
Autopilot might not be able to raise elevators,
on ground, without assistance from pilot.
REPORT: VB-860
9-13
SECTION 9
SUPPLEMENTS

PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
(4) Hold control wheel and disengage autopilot by pressing Master

Autopilot Disconnect/Trim Interrupt Switch button. Check
Roll and Pitch controls to assure autopilot has disconnected.
TRIM SYSTEM
"
General
This aircraft is equipped with a Command Trim System designed to
withstand any type of single malfunction, either mechanical or
electrical, without uncontrolled operation resulting. The preflight
check procedure is designed to uncover hidden failures that might
otherwise go undetected. Proper operation of the electric trim
system is predicated on conducting the following preflight check
before each flight. If the trim system fails any portion of the procedure, pull the trim circuit breaker out until trim system is repaired. Substitution of any trim system component for another
model is not authorized. For emergency interrupt information,
refer to Section 3 of this Supplement.
Command Electric Trim Switch
The Command Electric Trim Switch on the left hand portion of the
pilot's control wheel has two functions:
(I) When the top bar (AP OFF) is pressed, it disconnects the
Autopilot.
(2) When the top bar is pressed AND the rocker is moved forward,
nose down trim will occur, when moved aft, nose up trim will
occur.
(a) Preflight: Command Trim - Before Each Flight
(l) Check trim circuit breaker - IN.
(2) Trim Master Switch - ON.
(3) AP OFF - Check normal trim operation - UP. Grasp trim wheel
and check override capability. Check nose down operation. Recheck override.
(4) With trim operating -depress interrupt switch - trim should
stop - release interrupt switch - trim should operate.
(5) Activate center bar only. Push rocker fore and aft only. Trim
should not operate with either separate action.
REPORT: VB-860
9-14

PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
SECTION 9
SUPPLEMENTS
(b) Autotrim - Before Each Flight

(I) AP ON - (Roll and Pitch Sections) Check automatic operation
by activating autopilot pitch command UP then ON. Observe
trim operation follows pitch command direction.
NOTE
In autopilot mode, there will be approximately
a 3 second delay between operation of pitch
command and operation of trim.
(2) Press center bar (AP OFF) - release - check autopilot disengagement.
(3) Rotate trim wheel to check manual trim operation. Reset to
takeoff position prior to takeoff.
AUTOPILOT IN-FLIGHT PROCEDURE
(a) Trim airplane (ball centered).
(b) Check air pressure or vacuum to ascertain that the directional gyro
and attitude gyro are receiving sufficient air.
(c) Roll Section
(I) To engage - Center ROLL COMMAND knob, push ROLL
rocker to "ON" position. To turn, rotate console ROLL knob
in desired direction.
(2) For heading mode, set directional gyro with magnetic compass.
Push directional gyro HOG knob in, rotate to select desired
heading. Push console heading rocker (HOG) to "ON" position. (Maximum angle to bank will be 200 with heading lock
engaged.)
(d) Pitch Section (Roll section must be engaged prior to pitch section
engagement).
(I) Center pitch trim indicator with the pitch command disc.
(2) Engage pitch rocker switch. To change attitude, rotate pitch
command disc in the desired direction.
REPORT: VB860
9-15
SECTION 9
SUPPLEMENTS

PA44-180, SEMINOLE
(e) Altitude Hold

Upon reaching desired or cruising altitude, engage altitude hold
mode rocker switch. As long as Altitude Hold mode rocker is engaged, aircraft will maintain selected altitude. For maximum passenger comfort, rate of climb or descent should be reduced to approximately 500 FPM prior to altitude hold engagement. For
accurate Altitude Holding below 90 KIAS lower flaps one or two
notches.
NOTE
Prior to disengaging Altitude Hold mode,
rotate Pitch Command Disc to center.
(0 Radio Coupling VOR-ILS with H.S.!. type instrument display.

(Optional)
(I) VOR Navigation
a.
Tune and identify VOR Station. Select desired course by

rotating CRS knob of H.S.!.
b. Select OMNI mode on Radio Coupler.
Aircraft will tum to a 45 intercept angle to intercept the
selected VOR course. Intercept angle magnitude depends
on radio needle off - course magnitude, 100% needle deflection will result in 45 intercept angle, diminishing as
the needle off-set diminishes.
d. NAV mode - NA Vmode provides reduced VOR sensitivity
for tracking weak, or noisy, VOR signals. NAV mode
should be selected after the aircraft is established on
course.
(2) ILS-LOC Front Course

a. Set inbound, front, localizer course with H.S.1. course
knob.
b. Select LaC-Normal on Radio Coupler to intercept and
track inbound on the localizer. Select LaC-REV to intercept and track the localizer course outbound to proced ure
tum area.
REPORT: VB-860
916

PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
SECTION 9
SUPPLEMENTS
(3) ILS - Back Course

a. Set inbound, front, localizer course with H.S.1. course
knob.
b. Select LOC-REV, on radio coupler to intercept and track
inbound on the back localizer course. Select LOC-NORM
to intercept and track outbound on the back course to the
procedure tum area.
c. Engage HOG mode on autopilot console to engage coupler.
(g) Radio Coupling - VOR/ILS with standard directional gyro.
(Optional)
Radio Coupler operation in conjunction with a standard directional
gyro and VORl LOC display differs from operation with an integrated display (H.S.I.) only in one respect. The HOG bug is used
as the radio course datum and therefore must be set to match the desired VORIILS course as selected on the O.B.S.
(I) For VOR Intercepts and Tracking:
Select the desired VOR Course and set the HOG bug to the
same heading. Select OMNI mode on the coupler and engage
HOG mode on the autopilot console.
(2) For ILS Front Course Intercepts and Tracking:
Tune the localizer frequency and place the HOG bug on the
inbound, front course heading. Select LOC-NORM mode on
the coupler and engage HOG mode on the autopilot console.
(3) For LOC Back Course Intercepts and Tracking:
Tune the localizer frequency and place the HOG bug on the
inbound course heading to the airport. Select LOC-REV mode
on the coupler and engage HOG mode on the autopilot
console.
(h) Coupled Approach Operations
(I) VOR or LOC
a. After arrival at the VOR Station, track outbound to the
procedure tum area as described in Section 4 (1) or (g) as
appropriate. Slow to 110 KIAS and lower one notch of
flaps.
b. Use HOG mode and Pitch or Altitude Hold modes as
appropriate during procedure turn.
REPORT: VB-860
917
SECTION 9
SUPPLEMENTS
c.
d.
e.

PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
At the F.A.F. inbound, return to pitch mode for control of

descent and lower landing gear.
At the M. D.A. select altitude hold mode and add power for
level flight. Monitor altimeter to assure accurate altitude
control is being provided by the autopilot.
Go Around - For missed approach select desired pitch attitude with pitch command disc and disengage altitude
hold mode. This will initiate the pitch up attitude change.
Immediately add takeoff power and monitor Altimeter and
rate of climb for positive climb indication. After climb is
established, retract flaps and gear. Adjust attitude as
necessary for desired airspeed and select HDG mode for
tum from the VOR final approach course.
(2) ILS - Front Course Approach With Glide Slope Capture.

(Optional)
a. Track inbound to LOM as described in Section 4 (f) or (g)
above and in Altitude Hold mode.
b. Inbound to LOM slow to 100 to 110 KIAS and lowerflaps
one notch.
c. Automatic Glide Slope capture will occur at Glide Slope
intercept if the following conditions are met:
I. Coupler in LOC-Normal mode.
2. Altitude Hold mode engaged (Altitude Rocker on
Console).
3. Under Glide Slope for more than 20 seconds.
4. Localizer radio frequency selected on NAV Receiver.
d. At Glide Slope Intercept immediately lower landing gear
and reduce power to maintain approx.imately 90-100 KIAS
on final approach. Glide Slope capture is indicated by
lighting of the green Glide Slope engage Annunciator
Lamp and by a slight pitch down of the aircraft.
e. Monitor localizer and Glide Slope raw data throughout
approach. Adjust power as necessary to maintain correct
final approach airspeed. AU power changes should be of
small magnitude and smoothly applied for best tracking
performance. Do not change aircraft configuration during
approach while autopilot is engaged.
REPORT: VB-160
9-18

PA-44-IIO, SEMINOLE
f.
SECTION 9
SUPPLEMENTS
Conduct missed approach maneuver as described in (h) (I)

e. above.
NOTE
Glide Slope Coupler will not automatically decouple from Glide Slope. Decoupling may be
accomplished by any of the following means:
I. Disengage Altitude Mode.
2. Switch Radio Coupler to HDQ Mode.
3. Disengage Autopilot.
SECTION S - PERFORMANCE
No changes to the basic performance provided by Section 5 ofthe Pilot's
REPORT: VB-160
9-19
SECTION 9
SUPPLEMENTS

PA-44180, SEMINOLE
REPORT: VB8(i0
920

PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
SECTION 9
SUPPLEMENTS
SUPPLEMENT 3
PIPER ELECTRIC PITCH TRIM
SECTION I - GENERAL
airplane when the optional Piper Electric Pitch Trim is installed. The
information contained within this supplement is to be used "asdescribed"in
This supplement has been FAA Approved" as a permanent part of this
handbook and must remain in this handbook at all times when the optional
Piper Electric Pitch Trim is installed.
No changes ofthe basic limitations provided by Section 2 ofthis Pilot's
(a) In case of malfunction, ACTIVATE disconnect switch located on
the instrument panel below the left control wheel to OFF position.
(b) In case of malfunction, overpower the electric trim at either control
wheel.
(c) Maximum altitude change with a 4 second delay in recovery initiation is 600 feet and occurs in the cruise configuration. Maximum
altitude change in the approach configuration with a 2 second
recovery delay is 250 feet.

REVISED: JANUAR Y 21, 1982
REPORT: VB-It)O
9-11
SECTION 9
SUPPLEMENTS

PA44180, SEMINOLE
SECTION 4 NORMAL PROCEDURES

The electric trim system may be turned ON or OFF by a switch located
on the instrument panel below the left control wheel. The pitch trim may be
changed when the electric trim system is turned on either by moving the
manual pitch trim control wheel or by operating the trim control switch on
the pilot's control yoke. To prevent excessive speed increase in the event of
an electric trim run-away malfunction, the system incorporates an automatic
disconnect feature which renders the system inoperative above
approximately 169 KIAS. The disconnected condition does not affect the
manual trim system.
No changes to the basic performance provided by Section 5 of this
Pilot's Operating Handbook are necessary for this supplement.
REPORT: VB-860
9-22

PA-44.1S0, SEMINOLE
SECTION 9
SUPPLEMENTS
SUPPLEMENT 4
KNS SO NAVIGATION SYSTEM
SECTION 1 GENERAL
airplane when the optional KNS 80 Navigation System is installed. The
This supplement has been "FAA Approved" asa permanent part of this
KNS 80 Navigation System is installed.
No changes to the basic limitations provided by Section 2 of this Pilot's
SECTION 3 EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
No changes to basic Emergency Procedures provided by Section 3 of
this Pilot's Operating Handbook are necessary for this supplement.
REPORT: VB860
923
SECTION 9
SUPPLEMENTS

PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
SECTION" - NORMAL PROCEDURES

(a) KNS 80 OPERAnON
The KNS 80 can be operated in anyone of 3 basic modes: (a) VOR,
(b) RNAV, or (c) ILS. To change from one mode to another, the
appropriate pushbutton switch is pressed, except that the ILS mode
is entered automatically whenever an ILS frequency is channeled
in the USE waypoint. The display will annunciate the mode by
lighting a message above the pushbutton. In addition to the
standard VOR and RN AV enroute (RNV ENR) modes, the KNS 80
has a constant course width or parallel VOR mode (VOR PAR)
and an RNA V approach mode (RNV APR). To place the unit in
either of these secondary modes the VOR pushbutton or the RNAV
pushbutton, as the case may be, is pushed a second time. Repetitive
pushing of the VOR button will cause the system to alternate
between the VOR and VOR PAR modes, while repetitive pushing
of the RNAV button causes the system to alternate between RNV
ENR and RNV APR modes.
(b) CONTROLS
(I) VOR BUTTON
Momentary pushbutton.
When pushed while system is in either RNV mode causes
system to go to V0 R mode. Otherwise the button causes system
to toggle between VOR and VOR PAR modes.
(2) RNAV BUTTON
When pushed while system is in either VOR mode causes
system to go to RNV ENR mode. Otherwise the button causes
system to toggle between RNV ENR and RNV APR modes.
(3) HOLD BUTTON
Two position pushbutton.
When in depressed position, inhibits DME from channeling to
a new station when the VOR frequency is changed. Pushing the
button again releases the button and channels the DME to the
station paired with the VOR station.
(4) USE BUTTON
Causes active waypoint to take on same value as displayed
waypoint and data display to go to FRQ mode.
REPORT: VB-860
I 9-24

PA-44-ISO, SEMINOLE
SECTION 9
SUPPLEMENTS
(5) DSP BUTTON

Causes displayed waypoint to increment by I and data display
to go to frequency mode.
(6) DATA BUTTON
Causes waypoint data display to change from FRQ to RAD to
DST and back to FRQ.
(7) OFF! PULL ID CONTROL
a. Rotate counterclockwise to switch off power to the
KNS 80.
b. Rotate clockwise to increase audio level.
c. Pull switch out to hear VOR Ident.
(8) DATA INPUT CONTROL
Dual concentric knobs. Center knob has "in" and "out"
positions.
a. Frequency Data
Outer knob varies J MHz digit.
A carryover occurs from the units to tens position.
Rollover occurs from 117 to J08, or vice versa.
Center knob varies frequency in .05 MHz steps regardless
of whether the switch is in its "in" or "out" position.
b.
Radial Data
Outer knob varies 10 degree digit.
A carryover occurs from tens to hundreds position.
A rollover to zero occurs at 360 degrees.
Center knob "in" position varies I degree digit.
Center knob "out" position varies 0.1 degree digit.
c.
Distance Data
Outer knob varies 10 NM digit.
A carryover occurs from the tens to hundreds place.
A rollover to zero occurs at 200 NM.
Center knob "in" position varies J NM digit.
Center knob "out" position varies 0.1 NM digit.
(9) COURSE SELECT KNOB

Located in COl unit.
Selects desired course through the VOR ground station or
waypoint.
ISSUED: MARCH I, 19S0
REVISED: JANUARY 22, 19S2
REPORT: VB-S60
}-25
SECTION 9
SUPPLEMENTS

PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
I REPORT: VB-860
9-26

PA-44.180. SEMINOLE
SECTION I)
SUPPLEMENTS
SUPPLEMENT 5
ANS 351 AREA NAVIGATION COMPUTER
SECTION t GENERAL
airplane when the optional ANS 351 Area Navigation Computeris installed.
ANS 351 Area Navigation Computer is installed.
No changes to basic Emergency Procedures provided by Section 3 of
REPORT: VB360
927

PA....4-180. SEMINOLE
SECTION 9
SUPPLEMENTS
SECTION" NORMAL PROCEDURES

AMBIENT LIGHT SENSOR
DISTANCE
WAYPOINT
NUMBER
WAYPOINT
SELECTOR
USE
BUTTON
CHECK
BUTTON
ANS 351 AREA NAVIGATION COMPUTER.

CONTROLS AND INDICATORS
(a) CONTROLS
CONTROL OR
INDICATOR
FUNCTION
Mode Control
Selects ENR (enroute) or APPR (approach)

modes of operation. In the enroute mode, COl
deviation is 1 mile/ dot, 5 miles full scale. In
approach. CDI deflection is 1/4 mile/dot, 1-1/4
miles full scale.
Waypoint Selector
Sequences display waypoints from 1 through 8.

Winking waypoint number indicates inactive
waypoints; steadily-on-waypoint number indicates active waypoint.
Return Button
Depressing RTN (return) button returns the

display to the active waypoint when an inactive
waypoint is currently being displayed.
REPORT: VBSciO
ISSUED: MARCH I. 1980
9-18

PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
CONTROL OR
INmCATOR
SECTION I)
SUPPLEMENTS
FUNCTION
Use Button
Depressing the USE button converts the waypoint being displayed into the active waypoint.
Radial Selector
Two concentric knobs set radial information

into the display. Knobs control information
as follows:
Large knob: Changes display in lO-degree
increments.
Small knob pushed in: Changes display 1degree increments.
Small knob pulled out: Changes display in
O.I-degree increments.
Distance Selector
Two concentric knobs set distance information

in nautical miles into the display. Knobs control
information as follows:
Large knob: Changes display in to-mile
increments.
Small knob pushed in: Changes display I-mile
increments.
Small knob pulled out: Changes display in
OJ-mile divisions from 00.0 through 100
miles. Beyond 100 nmi, changes display in
I-mile increments.
Check Button
Depressing CHK (check) button causes DME

and bearing indicators to display raw distance
and bearing information. RNAV computation,
COl deviation, to/from display, and autopilot
tracking of RNAV path remain unaffected. The
check button is spring-loaded to prevent
permanent actuation.
Ambient Light
Sensor
Automatically adjusts display lighting intensity

as a function of cockpit ambient light.
REPORT: VB-860
9-29
SECTION 9
SUPPLEMENTS

PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
(b) AREA 'NAVIGATION WAYPOINT PROGRAMMING

(J) Presentation Of Waypoint On Ground
Waypoints are entered after engine start, since the waypoint
information will probably be lost during the low-voltage
condition occurring during engine cranking. Waypoint data
should always be written in flight planning form to facilitate
checking later in flight. When power is first applied to the
ANS 351 and the system is in the RNAV mode, waypoint
number I will be active, (waypoint number not blinking) and
waypoint bearing and distance preset to zero will appear.
a. Waypoint number 1 coordinates are set into the ANS 351
using concentric knobs under bearing and distance display
fields.
b. The waypoint selection knob is then rotated to select waypoint number 2. Note that the waypoint number is blinking, indicating that the waypoint is at this point inactive.
Waypoint number 2 bearing and distance definitions are
then set into the ANS 351.
c. Set up the rest ofthedesired waypointsasdescribed above.
d. Press the RTN (return) pushbutton to display the active
waypoint.
(2) Changing Waypoints In Flight
To change a waypoint in flight, rotate the waypoint selector
until the desired waypoint number and coordinates are displayed on the ANS 351.
a. Verify that the waypoint definition is correct by compa ring
the display with the flight plan.
b. Uncouple the autopilot if tracking RNA V deviation.
c. Select the desired reference facility frequency on the
associated NAV receiver.
d. Depress the USE pushbutton and note that the waypoint
identification number stops winking.
e. Select the desired Course on OB5.
f. Recouple the autopilot after deviation and distance-towaypoint idications have stabilized.
REPORT: VB-860
9-30
ISSUED: MARCH t, 1980

PA44.180, SEMINOLE
SECTION 9
SUPPLEMENTS
SUPPLEMENT 6
AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
SECTION 1 GENERAL
This supplement supplies information necessary for the efficient
operation of the airplane when the optional air conditioning system is
installed. The information contained within this supplement is to be used "as
described" in conjunction with the complete handbook.
air conditioning system is installed.
The air conditioning system is a recirculating air system. The major
components include an evaporator, a condenser, a compressor, a blower,
switches and temperature controls.
The evaporator is located behind the rear baggage compartment. Air
from the baggage area is drawn through the evaporator by the blower and is
distributed through an overhead duct to individual outlets located adjacent
to each occupant.
The condenser is mounted aft of the evaporator on the bottom tailcone
skin. A continuously operating cooling fan ducts outside air through the
condenser and dumps it overboard, on the ground or in flight, when the air
conditioning is turned on.
The compressor is mounted on the front side of the left engine. It has an
electric clutch which automatically engages or disengages the compressor to
its belt drive system.
ISSUED: SEPTEMBER 26, 1980
REPORT: VB.860I
931
SECTION 9
SUPPLEMENTS

PA-44180, SEMINOLE
CLiMATE CONTROL CENTER

Figure I-I
The switches and temperature control are located on the lower right side
of the instrument panel. The temperature control regulates the temperature
of the cabin. Turning the control clockwise increases cooling;
counterclockwise decreases cooling.
The fan-speed switch and the air conditioner ON OFF switch are
inboard of the temperature control. The fan can be operated independently
of the air conditioning. However, the fan must be on for air conditioner
operation. Turning either switch off will disengage the compressor clutch
and switch off the condenser cooling fan. Cooling air should be felt within
two minutes after the air conditioner is turned on.
NOTE
If the system is not operating within 2 minutes,
tum the system OFF until the fault is corrected.
REPORT: VB860
I 9-32

PA-44180, SEMINOLE
SECTION 9
SUPPLEMENTS
The fan switch allows operation of the fan with the air conditioner
turned OFF to aid in cabin air circulation. "LOW" or "HlG H" can be
selected to direct a flow of air through the air conditioner outlets in the
overhead duct. These outlets can be adjusted or turned off individually.
Two circuit breakers on the circuit breaker panel protect the air
c('nditioning electrical system.
(a) To insure maximum climb performance the air conditioner must
be turned "OFF" manually prior to takeoff to disengage the
compressor and turn off the condenser cooling fan. Also the air
conditioner must be turned "OFF" manually before the landing
approach in preparation for a possible go-around.
(b) Placards
In full view of the pilot, in the area of the air conditioner controls
when the air conditioner is installed:
"WARNING: AIR CONDITIONER MUST BE OFF TO
INSURE NORMAL TAKEOFF CLIMB PERFORMANCE."
The air conditioner must be off during all one-engine inoperative
operations.
No other changes to the basic Emergency Procedures provided by
Section 3 of this Pilot's Operating Handbook are necessary for this
supplement.
REPORT: VB860
9-33
SECTION 9
SUPPLEMENTS

PA-44-180, SEMINOLE

Prior to takeoff, the air conditioner should be checked for proper
operation as follows:
(a) Check aircraft master switch "ON."
(b) Turn the air conditioner control switch to "ON" and the fan switch
to one of the operating positions. A slight decrease in left-engine
RPM, and an ammeter increase of about IS amps each, indicates
proper equipment operation. Cool air should be felt from the overhead outlets within 2 minutes.
(c) Turn the air conditioner control switch to "OFF." Left-engine
RPM should increase and the ammeter indication should drop.
(d) If the system does not respond as specified above, a malfunction
is indicated and further investigation should be conducted prior
to flight.
The above operational check may be performed during flight if an inflight failure is suspected.
.
SECTION 5 PERFORMANCE
Installation of the air conditioner does not effect the basic cruise
performance information presented in Section S of this handbook. The
climb performance in Section S is not effected when the air conditioner is in
the off position.
NOTE
To insure maximum climb performance the air
conditioner must be turned off manually before
takeoff to. disengage the compressor. Also the
air conditioner must be turned off manually
before the landing approach in preparation for
a possible go-around. The air conditioner must
be off for all one-engine-inoperative
operations.
REPORT: VB-860
I 9-34

PA-44-UI0, SEMINOLE
SECTION 9
SUPPLEMENTS
Additionally, the air conditioning system is designed so that the

compressor will declutch when the throttle is advanced to the full throttle
position to provide maximum performance should the air conditioner be in
the on position inadvertently,
REPORT: VB860
935
SECTION 9
SUPPLEMENTS

PA-44180, SEMINOLE
REPORT: VB860
I 936

PA-44-18G, SEMINOLE
SECTION 9
SUPPLEMENTS
SUPPLEMENT .,
CENTURY 21 AUTOPILOT INSTALLATION
SECTION 1 - GENERAL
This supplement supplies information necessary for the operation ofthe
airplane when the optional Century 21 Autopilot is installed in accordance
with STC SA3376SW-D. The information contained within this supplement
is to be used in conjunction with the complete handbook.
This supplement has been uFAA Approved" as a permanent part of this
Century 21 Autopilot is installed.
(a) Maximum airspeed for autopilot operation is 185 KIAS.
(b) Autopilot OFF during takeoff and landing.
(a) AUTOPILOT
In the event of an autopilot malfunction, or anytime the autopilot is

not performing as commanded, do not attempt to identify the
problem. Regain control of the aircraft by overpowering and
immediately disconnecting the autopilot by depressing the AP
ON-OFF switch on the programmer OFF.
Do not operate until the system failure has been identified and
corrected.
REPORT: VB-86G
9-37
SECTION 9
SUPPLEMENTS

PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
(I) Altitude Loss During Malfunction:

a. An autopilot malfunction during climb, cruise or descent
with a 3 second delay in recovery initiation could result in
as much as 590 of bank and 350' altitude loss. Maximum
altitude loss was recorded at 185 KIAS during descent.
b. An autopilot malfunction during an approach with a I
second delay in recovery initiation could result in as much
as 180 bank and 40' altitude loss. Maximum altitude loss
measured in approach configuration, and operating either
coupled or uncoupled, single or multi-engine.
(b) COMPASS SYSTEM
(I) Emergency Operation With Optional NSD 360A (HSI) Slaved
and/ or Non-Slaved:
NSD 360A
a. Appearance of HDG Flag:
I. Check air supply gauge (vac or pressure) for adequate
air supply (4 in. Hg. min.).
2. Check compass circuit breaker.
3. Observe display for proper operation.
b. To disable heading card - pull circuit breaker and use
magnetic compass for directional data.
NOTE
should not be used.
c.
d.
With card disabled VORl Localizer and Glide Slope displays are still functional; use card set to rotate card to
aircraft heading for correct picture.
Slaving Failure - (i.e. failure to self correct for gyro drift):
l. Check gyro slaving switch is set to No. I position (if
equipped with Slave No. I - No.2 switch) or "Slaved"
position when equipped with Slaved and Free Gyro
Mode Switch.
2. Check for HDG Flag.
4. Reset heading card while observing slaving meter.
REPORT: VB-860
9-38

PA-44-180. SEMINOLE
SECTION 9
SUPPLEMENTS
NOTE
failure.
5.
6.
Select slaving amplifier No.2, if equipped.

Reset heading card while checking slaving meter. If
proper slaving indication is not obtained, switch to free
gyro mode and periodically set card as an unslaved
gyro.
NOTE
In the localizer mode, the "TO-FROM"arrows

installation.
Refer to Edo-Aire Mitchell Century 21 Autopilot Operator's Manual,
PiN 68S805, dated 1-79 for Autopilot Description and Normal Operating
Procedures.
(a) PREFLIGHT PROCEDURES
NOTE
During system functional check the system
must be provided adequate D.C. voltage (12.0
VDC min.) and instrument air (4.2 in. Hg.
min.). It is recommended that one engine
(minimum) be operated to provide the
necessary power and that the aircraft be
positioned in a level attitude, during the
functional check.
REPORT: VB860
9-39
SECTION 9
SUPPLEMENTS

PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
(b) AUTOPILOT WITH STANDARD O.G.

(I) Engage autopilot.
(2) Control wheel movement should correspond to HOG
command input.
(3) Grasp control wheel and override roll servo actuator to assure
override capability.
(4) With HOG bug centered select NAV or APPR mode and note
control wheel movement toward VOR needle offset.
(5) Select REV mode and note control wheel movement opposite
VOR needle offset.
(6) Disengage autopilot.
(7) Check aileron controls through full travel to assure complete
autopilot disengagement.
(c) AUTOPILOT WITH COMPASS SYSTEM (NSO 360A)
(For other compass systems, refer to appropriate manufacturer's
instructions)
(I) Check slaving switch in slave or slave I or 2 position, as appropriate. (Slaving systems with R.M.l. output provide only slave
and free gyro positions.)
(2) Rotate card to center slaving meter - check HOG displayed
with magnetic compass HOG.
(3) Perform standard VOR receiver check.
(4) Perform Steps (I) - (7) in Section 4 item (b) except in Steps (4)
and (5) substitute course arrow for HOG bug when checking
control wheel movement in relation to L/ R needle. HOG bug
is inoperative with NA V, APPR, or REV mode selected.
(d) IN-FLIGHT PROCEDURE
(I) Trim aircraft for existing flight condition (all axes).
(2) Rotate heading bug to desired heading. Engage autopilot.
(3) During maneuvering flight control aircraft through use of the
HOG bug. (HOG mode)
(4) For navigation operations select modes as required by the
operation being conducted and in accordance with the mode
description provided in the Century 21 Operator's Manual.
SECTION S PERFORMANCE
REPORT: VB-860
I 9-40
ISSUED: SEPTEMBER 26,1980

PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
SECTION 9
SUPPLEMENTS
SUPPLEMENT II
CENTURY 41 AUTOPILOT INSTALLATION
SECTION 1 - GENERAL
airplane when the optional Century 41 Autopilot Model AK873 or Century
41 Flight Director Autopilot Mode AK873FD is installed in accordance
with STC SA3375SW-D. The information contained within this supplement
is to be used in conjunction with the complete handbook.
Century 4J Autopilot or the Century 41 Flight Director Autopilot is
installed.
(a) Autopilot use prohibited above 185 KIAS.
(b) Autopilot OFF during takeoff and landing.
(c) Required Placard, PI N 13A990 stating "Conduct trim check prior
to first flight of day - (See A.F. M.)" to be installed in clear view of
pilot.
(d) Autopilot coupled Go-Around maneuvers prohibited [See Section
4 item (i)(3)].
(e) Category I operations only.

REPORT: VB-860
9-41
SECTION 9
SUPPLEMENTS

PA-44-180, SEMINOLE

(a) AUTOPILOT
In the event of an autopilot malfunction, or anytime the autopilot
is not performing as commanded, do not attempt to identify the
problem system. Regain control by overpowering and immediately
disconnecting the autopilot. This will disable both the 'autotrim
system and the autopilot system. H the malfunction was in the auto
trim system there may be residual control wheel force after the
system is OFF. Be prepared for any residual trim force and retrim,
as necessary, using the aircraft's primary trim control system.
NOTE
Do not overpower autopilot in pitch for more
than approximately 3 seconds as the autotrim
system will cause an increase in pitch
overpower forces.
(I) Autopilot may be disconnected by:
a. Depressing "AP OFF" bar on pilot's trim switch.
b. Depressing the AP ON-OFF switch on the programmer.
c. Depressing master disconnect switch on pilot's control
wheel.
(2) Autotrim may be disconnected by:
a. Depressing the autopilot ON-OFF switch - OFF.
b. Placing the autotrim master switch - OFF.
c. Depressing master disconnect switch on pilot's control
wheel.
After failed system has been identified, pull system circuit
breaker and do not operate until the system has been corrected.
(3) Single Engine Operations:
a. Engine. failure during an autopilot approach operation:
Disengage autopilot, conduct remainder of approach
manually.
b. Engine failure during normal climb, cruise, descent:
Retrim aircraft, perform normal aircraft engine out procedures.
REPORT: VB-860
9-42

PA-44-180. SEMINOLE
c.
SECTION 9
SUPPLEMENTS
Maintain aircraft yaw trim throughout aU single engine

operations.
NOTE
Single engine operations below Single Engine

Best Rate of Climb Airspeed may require
manual rudder application to maintain
directional trim depending upon aircraft
configuration and power applied.
(4) Altitude Loss During Malfunction:
a. An autopilot malfunction during climb or cruise with a 3
second delay in recovery initiation could result in as much
as 59" bank and 100' altitude loss. Maximum altitude los&.
measured at 185 KIAS during descent.
b. An autopilot malfunction during an approach with a I
second del~y in recovery initiation could result in as much
as 200 bank and ~Q' altitude loss. Maximum altitude loss
measured in apprc>ach configuration, gear down, and
operating either coupled or uncoupled, single or multiengine.
(b) COMPASS SYSTEM
(1) Emergency Operation With Optional NSD 360A (HSI) Slaved
and/ or Non-Slaved:
NSD 360A
a. Appearance of HDG Flag:
]. Check air supply gauge (vac or pressure) for adequate
air supply (4 in. Hg. min.).
3. Observe display for proper operation.
b. To disable heading card - pull circuit breaker and use
magnetic compass for directional data.
NOTE
should not be used.
ISSUED: SEPTEMBER 26.1980

REVISED: APRIL 10.1981
REPORT: VB-860
9-43
SECTION 9
SUPPLEMENTS

PA-44-J80, SEMINOLE
c. 'With card disabled VORl Localizer and Glide Slope displays are still functional; use card set to rotate card to
aircraft heading for correct picture.
d. Slaving Failure - (i.e. failure to self correct for gyro drift):
I. Check gyro slaving switch is set to No. I position (if
equipped with Slave No. I - No.2 switch) or "Slaved,.
position when equipped with Slaved and Free Gyro
Mode Switch.
2. Check for HDG Flag.
4. Reset heading card while observing slaving meter.
NOTE
failure.
5.
6.
7.
Select slaving amplifier No.2, if equipped. If not

equipped. proceed with No.7.
Reset heading card while checking slaving meter. If
proper slaving indication is not obtained,
Switch to free gyro mode and periodically set card as
an unslaved gyro.
NOTE
In the localizer mode, the"TO~FROM"arrows

installation.
REPORT: VB-860
9-44

PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
SECTION 9
SUPPLEMENTS

(a) NORMAL OPERATING PROCEDURES
NOTE
'This autopilot is equipped with an AI P "OFF"
warning horn that will sound for
approximately 4 seconds anytime the autopilot
is disengaged. This will be accompanied by an
"AI P" message flash on the autopilot remote
annunciator for approximately 5 seconds.
The horn may be silenced before the 4 second time limit is up by:
(1) Pressing "r' bar atop command trim switch.
(2) Or by re-engaging the autopilot.
NOTE
If this autopilot is equipped with a Flight
Director steering horizon the F I D must be
switched on before the autopilot may be
engaged. Any autopilot mode may be
preselected and will be retained upon autopilot
engagement.
CAUTION
Flight Director Autopilot versions only are
equipped with a remote go-around switch.
When GI A mode is selected the AUTOPILOT
WILL DISCONNECT and warning horn will
sound. Pilot may use Flight Director steering
for missed approach guidance and after aircraft
is stabilized in a proper climb with gear and
flaps up autopilot may be re-engaged and will
retain GI A mode. Autopilot only versions (no
Flight Director) do not have a G/ A switch.
REPORT: VB-860
9-45
SECTION 9
SUPPLEMENTS

PA-44i80. SEMINOLE
CAUTIONS
To avoid inadvertent or false glideslope
captures while operating on the localizer use
NAV mode instead of APR mode.
Refer to Edo-Aire Mitchell Century 41
Operator's Manual, PIN 68S803, dated 1-79
for additional System Description and Normal
Operating Procedures.
(b) PREFLIGHT PROCEDURES
NOTE
During system functional check, the system
must be provided adequate D.C. voltage (12.0
VDC min.) and instrument air (4.2 in. Hg.
min.). It is recommended that one engine be
operated (minimum) to provide the necessary
power and that the aircraft be positioned in a
level attitude, during the functional check.
(I) AUTOPILOT (F/D Switch ON if FlO Equipped)
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
Engage autopilot by pushing programmer OFF - ON

switch ON.
Rotate D.G. HOG bug left then right and verify that
control wheel movement corresponds to HOG command
input.
Press pitch modifier button first up then down and note
that pitch control follows pitch command input. Autotrim
should follow pitch command input after approximately
three second delay.
Grasp control wheel and override roU and pitch servo
actuators to assure override capability.
Hold control yoke and disengage autopilot by activating
the control wheel trim switch.
Check controls through full travel in roU and pitch to
assure complete autopilot disengagement.
Retrim aircraft for takeoff.
REPORT: VB-860
946

PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
SECTION 9
SUPPLEMENTS
(c) TRIM SYSTEM

The autopilot is provided with an electric elevator trim system
having two modes of operation. When the autopilot is engaged and
the trim master switch is ON, automatic electric trim (autotrim) is
provided. When the autopilot is disengaged, command electric
elevator trim is available by use of the control wheel switch provided
or by use of the primary trim control wheel. The electric elevator
trim system has been designed to withstand any type of single
failure, either mechanical or electrical, without uncontrolled
operation resulting. The automated system self test circuit provided, in conjunction with a functional check, described below, will
uncover internal failures that otherwise could remain undetected
and thus compromise the fail-safe properties of the system. Proper
operation of the system is, therefore, predicated on conducting the
following preflight check before first flight of each day. If the trim
system fails any portion of this test, tum the autotrim master switch
OFF and pull the autotrim circuit breaker, until the system is
corrected.
The command electric trim switch on the left portion ofthe pilot's
control wheel has two functions:
(l) When the top bar (AP OFF) is pressed, it disconnects the autopilot.
(2) When the top bar is pressed and the rocker is moved forward,
nose down trim will occur; when moved aft, nose up trim will
occur.
Command Trim Before the First Flight of Each Day
(1) Trim master switch - ON.
(2) Verify normal trim UP and DOWN operation with control

wheel switch.
(3) Press - center bar only - then release center bar.
(4) Push rocker fore and aft - only. Trim should not operate with
either separate action.
ISSUED: SEPTEMBER 26. 1980
REPORT: VB-360
9-47
SECTION 9
SUPPLEMENTS

PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
Any failure of the preceding operations indicates that a failure

exists in the system and the Command Trim shall not be operated
until the failure has been identified and corrected.
Autotrim - Before the First Flight of Each Day
(I) Check trim master switch ON, autopilot OFF.
(2) Press and hold TEST pushbutton on Mode Annunciator.

Verify the following sequence. (Each sequence wiUlast approximately two seconds.):
a. All annunciations light with FAIL and AP flashing.
b. Autotrim flashes, goes steady, then flashes.
c. All lights go steady.
d. After three to five seconds, AUTOTRIM and FAIL flash
continually.
(3) With TEST button on the Mode Annunciator still depressed,
verify Trim will not operate in either direction with the Control
Wheel Switch.
(4) Release TEST pushbutton. All lights except HDG and ATT
shall extinguish.
Any deviation from the above sequence indicates that a failure
exists in either the primary system or in the monitor circuits. The
autopilot and trim system shall not be operated until the failure has
been identified and corrected.
CAUTION
Recheck trim position prior to initiating

takeoff.
(d) FLIGHT DIRECTOR
(I) Check circuit breaker - IN.
(2) Flight director switch on steering horizon - ON. (Adjacent to
instrument on single cue horizon.)
(3) Pitch modifier DN - UP - check pitch steering indicator moves
appropriately.
(4) HDG bug RT - LT - check roll steering indicator moves
appropriately.
REPORT: VB-860
I 9-48

PA....4-IIO, SEMINOLE
SECTION I)
SUPPLEMENTS
(e) COMPASS SYSTEM (NSD 360A)

For other compass systems, refer to appropriate manufacturer's
instructions.
(1) Check slaving switch in slave or slave I or 2 position, as appropriate. (Slaving systems with R.MJ. output provide only slave
and free gyro positions.)
(2) Rotate card to center slaving meter - check HDG displayed
with magnetic compass HDG.
(3) Perform standard VOR receiver check.
(4) NAV - APPR - Engage NAV or APPR mode switch and
observe steering bar indicates turn toward the VOR needle.
NOTE
If the Omni Bearing Selector is more than 45
from the aircraft heading, the flight director
steering bar wiJI only indicate a turn toward the
omni bearing.
(f) IN-FLIGHT PROCEDURE - FLIGHT DIRECTOR
(I) Century 41 circuit breaker - IN. Flight director switch - ON.
(2) Adjust HDG bug to aircraft heading and select desired pitch
attitude by activation of the CWS (Pitch Synch) switch or the
modifier switch.
(3) Maneuver aircraft manually to satisfy the commands presented. Select other modes as desired; refer to Century 41
Operator's Manual for mode description.
(g) IN-FLIGHT PROCEDURE - AUTOPILOT/FLIGHT DIRECTOR AUTOPILOT

(I) Flight director switch - ON, if F/D equipped. Rotate heading
bug to desired heading.
(2) Trim aircraft for existing flight condition (all axes). Engage
autopilot.
(3) During maneuvering flight - control aircraft through use of the
HDG bug and the pitch modifier. (HDG-AIT modes) (For use
of pitch synch switch see Operator's Manua!.)
(4) For navigation operations select modes as required by the
operation being conducted and in accordance with the mode
description provided in Operator's Manua!. For specific instructions relating to coupled instrument approach operations,
refer to Special Operations and Information Section 4, item (i).
REPORT: VB-160
9-49
SECTION 9
SUPPLEMENTS

PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
(h) IN-FLIGHT PROCEDURE - COMMAND/ AUTOTRIM

SYSTEM
(I) Trim master switch - ON.
(2) When the autopilot is engaged, pitch trim is accomplished and
maintained automatically.
(3) With the autopilot OFF, command trim is obtained by pressing
and rocking the combination TRIM-AP disconnect bar on the
pilot's control wheel trim switch.
(i) SPECIAL OPERATIONS AND INFORMATION
(I) Altitude Hold Operation:
For best results, reduce rate of climb or descent to 1000 PPM
before engaging altitude hold mode.
(2) Instrument Approach Operations:
Initial and/or intermediate approach segments should be
conducted between 95-110 KIAS with the flaps extended as
desired. Upon intercepting the glide path or when passing the
final approach fix (FAF) immediately lower the landing gear
and reduce the power for approximately 80-95 KIAS on the
final approach segment. Adjust power as necessary during
remainder of approach to maintain correct airspeed. Monitor
course guidance information (raw data) throughout the
approach. All power changes should be ofsmall magnitude and
smoothly applied for best tracking performance. Do not
change aircraft configuration during approach while autopilot
is engaged. For approaches without glide path coupling, adjust
pitch attitude in conjunction with power to maintain desired
airspeed and descent rate.
NOTE
Flight director or autopilot will not decouple
from the GS or localizer in the event of radio
failure, however, wamings will flash in the
mode appropriate to the failure. Monitor
course guidance raw data during the approach
to assure signal quality.
REPORT: VB-860
950

PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
SECTION 9
SUPPLEMENTS
(3) Instrument Approach Go-Around Maneuver (Flight Director

Version Only):
a. Select GA mode at the remote GA switch. Autopilot will
disconnect and warning horn will sound.
b. Add takeoff power, or power as desired.
c. Check the correct attitude and that a positive rate of climb
is indicated, then raise gear and flaps.
d. Pilot may hand fly aircraft with reference to flight director
steering information.
e. After aircraft is established in climb, gear and flaps up,
autopilot may be re-engaged by pushing "ON" button on
console if flight director steering is switched on.
f. Set desired HDG and select HDG mode for lateral
maneuvering.
SECTION 5
REPORT: VB-860
9-51
SECTION 4)
SUPPLEMENTS

PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
REPORT: VB-860
9-52

PA-44-t80, SEMINOLE
SECTION 9
SUPPLEMENTS
SUPPLEMENT 9
PIPER CONTROL WHEEL CLOCK INSTALLATlON
SECTION I - GENERAL
airplane when the optional Piper Control Wheel Clock is installed. The
Piper Control Wheel Clock is installed.
SECTION 1- LIMITATIONS
No changes to the basic Emergency Procedures provided by Section 3 of
(a) SETTING
While in the CLOCK. mode, the time and the date can be set by the
operation of the RST button.
REPORT: VB-860
9-53
SECTION 4)
SUPPLEMENTS

PA....4-180, SEMINOLE
(b) DATE SETIING

Pressing the RST button once will cause the date to appear with the
month flashing. Pressing the ST-SP button will advance the month
at one per second, or at one per push, utltil the right month appears.
Pressing the RST button once again will cause the date to flash, and
it can be set in a similar manner.
(c) TIME SETIING
The RST button must now be pressed two times to cause the hours
digits to flash. The correct hour can be set in as described above.
Pressing the RST button once again will now cause the minutes
digits to flash. The minutes should be set to the next minute to come
up at the zero seconds time mark. The RST button is pressed once
more to hold the time displayed. At the time mark, the ST-SP
button is pressed momentarily to begin the time counting at the
exact second.
If the minutes are not advanced when they are flashing in the set
mode, pressing the RST button will return the clock to the normal
timekeeping mode without altering the minutes timing. This feature
is useful when changing time zones, when only the hours are to be
changed.
(d) AUTOMATIC DATE ADVANCE
The calendar function will automatically advance the date correctly
according to the four year perpetual calendar. One day must be
added manually on Feb. 29 on leap year. The date advances
correctly at midnight each day.
(e) DISPLAY TEST
Pressing both the RST and ST-SP buttons at the same time will
result in a display test function.
REPORT: VB860
I 954

PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
SECTION 9
SUPPLEMENTS
SUPPLEMENT 10
RCA WEATHERSCOUT II WEATHER RADAR SYSTEM
SECTION I GENERAL
airplane when the optional RCA WeatherScout II Weather Radar System is
installed. The information contained within this supplement is to be used in
RCA WeatherScout II Weather Radar System is installed.
No changes to the basic Emergency Procedures by Section 3 of this
REPORT: VB-860
9-55

PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
SECTION 9
SUPPLEMENTS

(a) SYSTEM CONTROLS
All controls used to operate the radar system are located on the
front panel. These controls and the display features are indexed and
identified in Figure 4-1 and described in Table 4-3.
RCn--
INDICATOR CONTROLS AND DISPLAY FEATURES

Figure 4-1
REPORT: VB-860
9-56

PA-44-1lW, SEMINOLE
SECTION )
SUPPLEMENTS
(I)
OFF
On/ Off function: full CCW rotation of

INTensity control places system in OFF
condition.
(2)
INT
Rotary control used to regulate brightness

(INTensity) of display.
(3)
TILT
Rotary control used to adjust antenna

elevation position. Control index.es increments of tilt from 0 to 12 degrees up or
down.
(4)
RANGE
12/30/60/90
or
12/30/60/120
Rotary switch used to select one of four

ranges.
(5)
CYC
Pushbutton switch used to select cyclical

contour mode. Data is presented alternately
as normal for 0.5 seconds, then contoured
for 0.5 seconds. Pressing switch a second
time restores normal or WX mode.
(6)
Range Field
Maximum selected range is displayed.

Maximum range is always displayed when
indicator is in on-eondition.
(7)
Test Field
Test block displays three illumination

levels.
(8)
Range Mark
Identifier
Individual label displayed for each range

mark.
(9)
Mode Field
Operating mode is displayed as WX or

CYC.
When system is first turned on, WAIT is
displayed until system times out (30-40
seconds).

Table 4-3
REPORT: VB-860
9-57
SECTION 9
SUPPLEMENTS

PA-44180, SEMINOLE
(b) PRELIMINARY CONTROL SETTINGS

Place the Indicator controls in the following positions before
applying power from the aircraft electrical system:
INTensity control
TILT controL
RANGE switch
Fully counterclockwise, in OFF

Fully upward
12 nauti'cal miles
(c) OPERATIONAL CONTROL SETTINGS

(I) Rotate INTensity control clockwise to bring system into ON
condition.
(2) Note that WAIT is displayed during warm-up period of
30-40 seconds.
(3) When WX is displayed, rotate INTensity control clockwise
until display brightness is at desired level.
(4) Set RANGE switch to desired range.
(5) Adjust TILT control for desired forward scan area.
(d) PRECAUTIONS
If the radar is to be operated while the aircraft is on the ground:
(l) Direct nose of aircraft such that antenna scan sector is free of
large metallic objects (hangars, other aircraft) for a distance of
100 yards (90 meters), and tilt antenna fully upward.
WARNING
Do not operate the radar during refueling
operations or in the vicinity of trucks or
containers accommodating flammables or
explosives; do not allow personnel within 15
feet of area being scanned by antenna when
system is transmitting.
(2) Flash bulbs can be exploded by radar energy.
(3) Since storm patterns are never stationary, the display is
constantly changing, and continued observation is always
advisable where areas of turbulence prevail.
REPORT: VB860
9-58

PA-44-110. SEMINOLE
SECTION 9
SUPPLEMENTS
No changes to the basic performance provided by Section 5 ofthe Pilot's
ISSUED: SEPTEMBER 26. 1910
REPORT: VB-160
9-59
SECTION 9
SUPPLEMENTS

PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
REPORT: VB-860
9-60

PA-44-t80, SEMINOLE
SECTION I)
SUPPLEMENTS
SUPPLEMENT It
RDR-160 WEATHER RADAR SYSTEM
SECTION 1 GENERAL
airplane when the optional RDR-J60 ~eather Radar System is installed.
RDR-J60 Weather Radar System is installed.
No changes to basic Emergency Procedures by Section 3 ofthis Pilot's
(a) SYSTEM CONTROLS
Table 4-3 lists and describes the system controls, all of which are
mounted on the panel of the radar indicator. Figure 4-1 illustrates
the location of these controls. Table 4-5 lists the alphanumeric readouts of range - range marks and mode selection as a function of
switch position.
REPORT: VB-860
9-61
SECTION 9
SUPPLEMENTS

PA.44-180, SEMINOLE
AU'lfANUMOICI
/ . - - - - ON8CIlEeH IlEADOUT
alLacmED MODE
HOLD
PUSHBUTTON
IIANGIMARIl
SPACIHG H.M.
...
\.
8WcmED
IIANOEH.M.
---
RAHGE SELECTOIl
T1LTCONTi'lOl.
BRIGHTNESS
CONTROl.
LOCATION OF CONTROLS
Figure 4-1
CONTROL/
FUNCTION
OPERATIONAL USE
OFF/STBY/TEST
l. Controls primary power to radar system.
Range Selector
2. Places system in "standby"condition during

warmup period and when system is not in
use.
3. Places system in "test" mode to determine
operability of system. No transmission in
"test" mode.
4. Selects operating range. Enables transmitter.

CONTROL FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
Table 4-3
REPORT: VB860
9-62

PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
CONTROL/
FUNCTION
Wx/GAIN/Wx A
Gain Control and
Mode Selector
SECTION 9
SUPPLEMENTS
OPERATIONAL USE
I. In Wx position, weather image gain is at preadjusted level. Contour operation is automatic and constant.
2. In GAIN position, 6 levels from MAP

(maximum gain) to ,MIN may be selected
for ground mapping operations. Contour
operation is disabled.
3. In Wx A position, the radar indicator display alternately cycles between the Wx position and the GAIN MAP position. This will
verify if a contour storm cell area is a storm
cell and not a lake or some other terrain
feature.
HOLD
Pushbutton
Video Hold/
Scan
TILT
Antenna Tilt
Control
When the HOLD pushbutton initially depressed, weather or ground mapping image
last presented is retained (frozen) on indicator
display in order to evaluate the significance
of storm cell movement. Depressing for a
second time reveals direction and distance of
target movement during hold period. During
HOLD mode, the antenna continues to scan
and the display will continue to be presented
as long as power is supplied to the system. The
word HOLD will be flashing.
Electrically adjusts the antenna toO move the
radar beam to IS degrees up or down from
horizontal ("0" position).
Control CRT picture intensity.
BRT
Brightness
Control
CONTROL FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION (cont)

Table 4-3 (cont)
REPORT: VB-860
9-63

PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
SECTION 9
SUPPLEMENTS
RADAR-160 WEATHER RADAR SYSTEM

Range Switch Position
Range-Range Mark Readout
"U"TEST
5,
10
20
40
80
160
40-10
5-1
10-2
20-4
40-10
80-20
160-40
Wx-MAP-Wx A Switch Position
Mode Readout
Wx
MAP
WxA
Wx
MAP
WxA
When the HOLD pushbutton is initially depressed, the MODE

READOUT displays flashing HOLD.
The MODE READOUT displays TEST.
ALPHANUMERIC READOUT
Table 4-5
I
,
(b) GENERAL OPERATING rRECAUTIONS

I
WARNING
!
Do not operate the I radar during refueling

operations or in thel vicinity of trucks or
explosives; do not allow personnel wHhin 15
REPORT: VB-860
9-64

PA-44-180 t SEMINOLE
SECTION 9
SUPPLEMENTS
(1) Rash bulbs can be exploded by radar energy.

(2) Since storm patterns are never stationary, the display is constantly changing, and continued observation is always advisable where areas of turbulence prevail.
NOTE
See RDR-l60 pilot manual for detailed
operating information and analysis of targets.
Operating Handbook. are necessary for this supplement.
REPORT: VB-860
9-65
SECTION 9
SUPPLEMENTS

PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
REPORT: VB860
9-66

PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
SECTION 9
SUPPLEMENTS
SUPPLEMENT U
RDR-I60/IN-2026A WEATHER RADAR SYSTEM

SECTION I - GENERAL
airplane when the optional RDR-160jIN-2026A Weather Radar System is
installed. The information contained within this supplement is to be used in
RDR-I60jIN-2026A Weather Radar System is installed.
SECTION 2 - LlMITAnONS
REPORT: V8-86'I
9-67
SECTION 9
SUPPLEMENTS
TAACIt
CURSOR
POSITION
IN DEGREES

PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
INDICATES
INDiCATES
fl.ASHES IN
HOlO CONDmOlI
SELECTED
MODE
WHEN FUNCTION
SWITCH IS
RANGE SElECTED SET TO TEST
SelIUN
IRtc;HTHESI
CONTROl.
RADAIlRECENER
GAIN CONTROl
USED Om.'f
WtTH OPTIONAL
ISUTTON POSITIONEDI
TRI\CK CURSOR
QUlPMENf
(N'AVPlUS
RANGE MARK
(30MIUI
WEATHER'
PlIESSTO
INCREASE RANGE
""ESS TO O8T..,1I
LIST OR (HANGE
MOOES
PRESS TO
DECREASE lWlGE
'HDlCAffS NAY
aunON flAESSED
But NAV OPf..,..
NOT CONNECTO
'-de FlI1t--
FUNCT10N
SWITCH
LOC''''''
PAWL
PRESS TO
RETAIN
Ot$P\.Ay
ANTENNA nLT
CONTROl
-----
LEf'T
RIGHT
PllESSTOMOVE
fflACKCURSOR
IN-2026A CONTROLS AND DISPLAYS

Figure 4-1
(a) EQUIPMENT OPERATION AND CONTROLS
(I) RDR-I60/lN-2026A CONTROLS AND DISPLAYS
Controls and displays for the RDR-160/IN-2026A Weather
Radar System are listed in table 4-3, with a functional description. Location of the controls and displays is shown in figure
4-1. All operating controls and displays are located on the
indicator.
REPORT: VB-860
9-68

PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
CONTROL/
DISPLAY
Function selector
SECTION )
SUPPLEMENTS
FUNCTION
I. OFF position removes primary power from
the system.
2. STBY position places system in the standby
condition during warm-up period and when
the system is not in use. No display.
3. TEST position selects test function to determine operability of the system. A test
pattern is displayed. NO transmission exists
in the TEST condition.
4. ON position selects the condition for normal
operation. Radar transmission exists in the
ON position.
[ t ] RANGE
button
Clears the display and places the indicator in

the next lower range each time the button is
pressed (eg: 40 to 20), until minimum range is
reached.
TILT control
Electrically adjusts the antenna to move the

radar beam up to + I5 degrees above the horizontal, or to a maximum of -15 degrees below
the horizontal position. The horizontal position is indicated as zero degrees on the control.
TRACK[...,..]
button
When pressed, a yellow track cursor line appears and moves to the right (in one degree
steps) while the button is held depressed. The
track cursor stops when the button is released,
and remains for about 10 to 15 seconds, then
disappears unless the button is pressed again.
The differential heading will be indicated in
yellow numerals in the upper left corner of the
display, and disappears simultaneously with
the track cursor.
CONTROL/DISPLAY FUNCTIONS
Table 4-3
REPORT: VB860
969
SECTION 9
SUPPLEMENTS
CONTROLI
DISPLAY

PA-44-J80, SEMINOLE
FUNCTION
TRACK [-]
button
When pressed, the yellow track cursor appears

and moves to the left while held depressed.
Operation is as explained above.
GAIN control
Varies the radar receiver gain when in the MAP

mode. Gain and the STC are preset in TEST
function and in the WX and WXA modes.
BRT control
Adjusts brightness of the display for varying

cockpit light conditions.
[ ] MODE
button
Pressing momentarily produces an "information list" on the display. Pressing again, while
information display is still present, advances
the indiCator display to the next higher mode
shown on the list. The list disappears after a few
seconds and the mode does not change if the
button is not pressed again. The following standard modes are available in the order shown.
NAV FLT LOG - Functions available
with optional IU-2023A.
MAP - Ground mapping
WXA - Weather mapping with alert.
The red area flashes.
WX - Weather mapping
NOTE: When the top mode is reached, the
button will not change the mode.
[ t ] MODE
button
Moves the indicator display to the next lower

mode each time the button is pressed while the
list is present. The sequence is as listed above.
NOTE: When the bottom mode (WX) is
reached, this button will not change
the mode.
CONTROL/DISPLAYFUNCTIONS (cont)
Table 4-3 (cont)
REPORT: VB-860
9-70

PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
CONTROL/
DISPLAY
SECTION 9
SUPPLEMENTS
FUNCTION
NAV button
(push-on/ push-off)
Operational only when optional IU-2023A Remote Computer Unit is connected. When actuated, provides NAV information superimposed over the MODE selected (WX, WXA,
or MAP). If interface is not connected, the
words NO NAV will be displayed in the lower
left corner.
[ ] RANGE
button
Clears the display and advances the indicator

to the next higher range each time the button
is pressed (eg: 20 to 40, 40 to 80, etc.), until 160
mile range is reached. The range selected is displayed in the upper right corner (on the last
range mark), and the distance to each of the
other range marks circles is displayed along the
right edge of the circles (arcs).
HOLD pushbutton
(push-on/push-off)
Retains the display (NAV and weather) when

button is actuated (push-on). The word HOLD
flashes in the upper left corner of the display.
The weather or ground mapping image last presented is retained (frozen) on indicator display
in order to evaluate the significance of storm
cell movement. Switching back to normal operation (pressing HOLD pushbutton a second
time) reveals direction and distance of target
movement during HOLD period. In HOLD,
the antenna continues to scan and a nonupdated display will continue to be presented
as long as power is supplied to the system. A
change in range selection with indicator in
HOLD results in a blank screen.
CONTROL/DiSPLA Y FUNCTIONS (cont)

Table 4-3 (cont)
REPORT: VB-860
9-71
SECTION 9
SUPPLEMENTS

PA-44180, SEMINOLE
(b) OPERATING PRECAUTIONS
WARNING
Do not operate the radar during refueling
operations or in the vicinity of trucks or
explosives. Do not allow personnel within 15
(I) Flash bulbs can be exploded by radar energy.
(2) Since storm patterns are never stationary, the display is constantly changing. Continued observation is always advisable
in stormy areas.
REPORT: VB860
972

PA......180, SEMINOLE
SECTION 9
SUPPLEMENTS
SUPPLEMENT 13
RCA COLOR WEATHERSCOUT II WEATHER RADAR SYSTEM
SECTION 1 - GENERAL
airplane when the optional RCA Color WeatherScout II Weather Radar
System is installed. The information contained within this supplement is to
be used in conjunction with the complete handbook.
RCA Color WeatherScout II Weather Radar System is installed.
No changes to the basic limitations provided by Section 2 ofthis Pilot's
REPORT: VBS60
973
SECTION 9
SUPPLEMENTS

PA-44-180, SEMINOLE

(a) SYSTEM CONTROLS
All controls used to operate the radar system are located on the indicator front panel. These controls and the display features are indexed and identified in Figure 4-1 and described in Table 4-3.
nCIi
m
OD
W
TIlt
.,.
bj
Al MK
OFf ~ON
b
Figure 4-1
(b) OPERATION
Preliminary Control Settings
Place the Indicator controls in the following positions before applying power from the aircraft electrical system:
INTensity control
TILT control
RANGE switch
REPORT: VB-860
9-74
Fully counterclockwise, in OFF

Fully upward
to nautical miles

PA-4"180, SEMINOLE
(I)
SECTION 9
SUPPLEMENTS
Display Area
See item A, D, and C for explanation of

alphanumeric display.
(A) Mode Field
Selected mode is displayed as WX, CYC,

MAP, or TEST. STDYisdisplayed ifR-T
is warming up and no mode is selected
after tum-on. WAIT is displayed if a
mode is selected prior to end of warm up
or when Indicator and Antenna are synchronizing.
(B) Auxiliary
Field
FRZ is displayed as a blinking word if

radar is in freeze mode (to remind pilot
that radar display is not being updated for
incoming target returns).
I 23 and color bar legend is displayed in
WX/C, TEST and MAP modes. In
weather mode color bar is green, yellow,
and red. In map mode, color bar is cyan,
yellow, and magenta.
(C) Range Mark
Identifiers
(2)
INT/OFF
Five labeled range marks are displayed

on each range. Label of furthest mark is
same as range selected. Range and azimuth marks are displayed in cyan for
WX/C and TEST, green for MAP.
Rotary control used to regulate brightness (intensity) of display.
On/ Off function: Full CCW rotation of
intensity control places system in OFF
condition. CW rotation from OFF setting
turns system on. STBY is displayed until
WX/C, MAP, or TEST is selected.

Table 4-3
REPORT: VB-860
975
SECTION 9
SUPPLEMENTS

PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
NOTE: WeatherScout systems using
RTA-I 00 I (wing-mounted), employs a time-delay circuitthat inhibits transmitter and antenna
operation for 4.5 minutes from
the time the aircraft engine is
turned on.
If WX/C or MAP is selected initially or
prior to the end of the warm-up period,
WAIT will be displayed until RT warms
up (approximately 30 seconds).
If TEST is selected immediately, WAIT
will be displayed until Antenna is synchronized (less than 4 seconds) and then
test pattern will appear.
(3)
WX/C
Alternate-action pushbutton switch used

to select weather mode or cyclic contour
mode.
If selected at turn-on, system will come up
in weather mode; second depression of
switch will select cyclic contour mode.
If selected when system is already operating in another mode, system will return
to weather mode; second switch depression will select cyclic contour mode.
In cyclic contour mode, 3-level (red) display will flash on and off at 1/2-second
intervals.
(4)
MAP
Pushbutton switch used to select ground

mapping mode.
INDICATOR CONTROLS AND DISPLAY FEATURES (cont)

Table 4-3 (cont)
REPORT: VB-860
9-76

PA-44-IIO, SEMINOLE
SECTION 9
SUPPLEMENTS
(5)
TEST
Pushbutton switch used to select test

mode. Special test pattern is displayed.
In test, transmitter does not transmit and
range is automatically 100 nm.
(6)
FRZ
Pushbutton switch used to select freeze

mode. Radar display is not updated with
incoming target return data. As a warning
to the pilot, FRZ level will flash on and
off at 1/ 2-second ,intervals.
(7)
AZ MK
Slide switch used to display threeazimuth markers at 30-degree intervals.
(8)
TILT
Rotary control that enables pilot to

select angles of antenna beam tilt with
relation to airframe. Rotating control
CW tilts beam upward; CCW rotation
tilts beam downward.
(9)
10/25/50/100/
200 (01-1005)
Push button switches used to select

desired range. Five range marks are displayed for each range.
INDICATOR CONTROLS AND DISPLAY FEATURES (cont)

Table 4-3 (cont)

REPORT: VB-160
9-77
SECTION 9
SUPPLEMENTS

PA-4....180, SEMINOLE
THIS PAGE INTENTiONALLY LEFT BLANK
REPORT: VB860
9-78

PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
SECTION 9
SUPPLEMENTS
PILOT'S OPERATING HANDBOOK

AND
FAA APPROVED AIRPLANE FLIGHT MANUAL
SUPPLEMENT NO. 14
FOR
ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION BUS MODIFICATION
This supplement must be attached to the Pilot's Operating Handbook
and FAA Approved Airplane Flight Manual when the Electrical
Distribution Bus Modification is installed in accordance with Piper Kit No.
764937V.
The information contained herein supplements or supersedes the
information in the basic Pilot's Operating Handbook and FAA Approved
Airplane Flight Manual only in those areas listed herein. For limitations,
procedures and performance information not contained in this supplement,
consult basic Pilot's Operating Handbook and FAA Approved Airplane
Flight Manual.
FAA APPROVED
W~ ~
WARD EVANS
D.O.A. NO. SO-I
VERO BEACH, FLORIDA
DATE OF APPROVAL
QEPORT: VB-860
9-79
SECTION 9
SUPPLEMENTS

PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
SECTION 1 - GENERAL
airplane when the Electrical Distribution Bus Modification is installed in
accordance with "FAA Approved" Piper data.
No change

ELECTRICAL POWER lOSS
AlT annunciator light illuminated.
Ammeters
check to determine inop ALT
Ifone ammeter shows zero.

Inop. ALT switch ........................................... OFF
ALT circuit breaker (SA) & (bOA)
Inop ALT switch

If power is not restored
Inop ALT switch. '" .. "
Electrical loads
"
'"
If both ammeters show'7ero

AL T switches
AL1 circuit breakers (SA) & (60A) '"
AL T switches
REPORT: VB860
9-80
check and reset

as required
ON
OFF
re-establish to 60 amps max.
both OFr
check both and reSt't

as required
ON one at a time
If either or both ALTS are restored
leave its associated switch ON
Turn inop AL T switch OFF

PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
Electrical loads
SECTION 9
SUPPLEMENTS
re-establish to 60 amps max.
If alternator outputs NOT restored:

AtT switches
OFF
Electrical loads
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. reduce to minimum
lAnd as soon as possible. The battery is the only remaining source of
electrical power.
If both alternators cannot be restored and the battery circuit breaker is
tripped, a main bus failure is indicated. Turn the emergency avionics switch
to ON. Reduce avionics loads to minimum. Land as soon as practical.
WARNING
NOTE
procedure. The gear position light will be
inoperative.

No change.
No change.
SECTION 6 - WEIGHT AND BALANCE
No change.
REPORT: VB-860
9-81
SECTION 9
SUPPLEMENTS

PA-44-180. SEMINOLE
SECTION 7 - DESCRIPTION
Modification of the electrical distribution system per Piper Kit 764 937V
provides for additional isolation of main power distribution wires and
elect rica I busses.
Three 60 amp circuit breakers were added for the output liries of the
battery, right alternator and left alternator respectively. A 30 amp breaker
was added to power the separate avionics bus. These four new breakers are
located just below the existing circuit breaker panel on the right instrument
panel and are placarded for their function. The existing emergency avionics
master switch is also relocated to this panel for better pilot access. An 80 amp
current limiter has also been added at the junction of the battery feed line and
the starter contactor.
No change in normal operation of the aircraft electrical system is
required by the addition of this supplement. Emergency procedures are
covered in Section 3.
REPORT: VB-860
9-82
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 10
SAFETY TIPS
Paragraph
Page
No.
No.
10. I
10.3
General... . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . .
Safety Tips ......................................
10-1
10-1
REPORT: VB860
JOi

PA-44-180. SEMINOLE
SECTION 10
SAFETY TIPS
SECTION 10
SAFETY TIPS
1).1 GENERAL
This section provides safety tips of particular value in the operation of
the Piper Seminole.
10.3 SAFETY TIPS
(a) Learn to trim for takeoff so that only a very light back pressure on
the wheel is required to lift the airplane off the ground.
(b) On takeoff. do not retract the gear prematurely. The airplane may
settle and make contact with the ground because of lack of flying
speed. atmospheric conditions. or rolling terrain.
(c) Flaps may be lowered at airspeeds up to III KIAS. To reduce flap
operating loads. it is desirable to have the airplane at a slower speed
before extending the flaps. The flap step will not support weignt if
the flaps are in any extended position. The flaps must be placed in
the "UP" position before they will lock and support weight on the
step.
(d) Before attempting to reset any circuit breaker, allow a two to five
minute cooling off period.
(e) Always determine position of landing gear by checking the gear
position lights.
(I) The shape of the nacelle fuel tanks is such that in certain maneuvers
and with low fuel levels. the fuel may move away from the tank
outlet. If the outlet is uncovered. the fuel flow will be interrupted
and a temporary loss of power may result. Pilots can prevent inadvertent uncovering of the outlet by avoiding maneuvers which
could result in uncovering the outlet.
ISSUED: MARCil 23.1978
REPORT: V8-860
101
SECTION 10
SAFETY TIPS

PA-44-180, SEMINOLE
Extreme running turning takeoffs should be avoided.

Prolonged slips and skids which result in excess of 2000 feet of
altitude loss, or other radical or extreme maneuvers which could
cause uncovering of the fuel outlet must be avoided as fuel flow
interruption may occur when the tank being used is not full.
(g) The rudder pedals are suspended from a torque tube which extends
across the fuselage. The pilot should become familiar with the
proper positioning of his feet on the rudder pedals so as to avoid
interference with the torque tube when moving the rudder pedals
or operating the toe brakes.
Anti-collision lights should not be operating when flying through
clouds, fog, or haze, since reflected light can produce spacial disorientation. Strobe lights should not be used in close proximity to the
ground such as during taxiing, takeoff or landing.
(i) In an effort to avoid accidents, pilots should obtain and study the
safety related information made available in FAA publications such
as regulations, advisory circulars, Aviation News, AIM and safety
aids.
(j) Pilots who fly above 10,000 feet should be aware of the need for
special physiological training: Appropriate training is available at
approximately twenty-three Air Force Bases throughout the United
States for a small fee. The training is free at the NASA Center in
Houston and at the FAA Aeronautical Center in Oklahoma.
Forms to be completed (Physiological Training Application and

Agreement) for application for the training course may be obtained
by writing to the following address:
Chief of Physiological Training, AAC-143
FAA Aeronautical Center
P. O. Box 25082
Oklahoma City, Oklahoma 73125
It is recommended that all pilots who plan to fly above 10,000 feet
take this training before flying this high and then take refresher
training every two or three years.
REPORT: VB-860
10-2


PA-44-t80, SEMINOLE
SECTION 10
SAFETY TIPS
(k) Sluggish RPM control and propeller overspeed with poor RPM
recovery after rapid throttle application are indications that
nitrogen pressure in the propeller dome is low.
(I) Experience has shown thatlthe training advantage gained by pulling
a mixture control or turniqg ofhhe fuel to simulate engine failure at

low altitude is not worth. the risk assumed, therefore it is recommended that instead of u~tng either of these procedures to simulate
loss of power at low altitude, the throttle be retarded slowly to idle
position. Fast reduction qf power may be hafmful to the engine. A
power setting of 2000 RPM and 11.5 in. Hg MAP is recommended
for simulated one engine operation.
(m) Before starting either engine, check. that all radio switches, light
switches and the pitot heat switch are in the OFF position so as not
to create an overloaded condition when the starter is engaged.
(n) The airplane should not be flown in severe turbulence as damage to
the airframe structure could result.
(0) The best speed for takeoff is about 75 KIAS under normal
conditions. Trying to pull the airplane off the ground at too Iowan
airspeed decreases the controllability of the airplane in the event of
an engine failure.
iSSUED: MARCH 23, 1978
REPORT: VB-860
10-3

PA 44 180 Seminole Information Manual 1979 1980

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

PA 44 180 Seminole Information Manual 1979 1980

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

PA 44 180 Seminole Information Manual 1979 1980

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Piper Seminole

Note: At the time of issuance, this manual was an exact

Revisions will be distributed whenever necessary as complete page

II. Identification of Revised Material

PILOT'S OPERATING HANDBOOK LOG OF REVISIONS

Revised para. 1.5; relocated

PILOT'S OPERATING HANDBOOK LOG OF REVISIONS (cont)

PILOT'S OPERATING HANDBOOK LOG OF REVISIONS (cont)

PILOT'S OPERATING HANDBOOK LOG OF REVISIONS (cont)

Rev. I (cont) i 6-26

para. 6. I I (g) from

I pg. 6-21; added new item 113.

PILOT'S OPERATING HANDBOOK LOG OF REVISIONS (eont)

Revised item 283; added item

Added Demo. X-Wind.

PILOT'S OPERATING HANDBOOK LOG OF REVISIONS (cont)

PILOT'S OPERATING HANDBOOK LOG OF REVISIONS (cont)

Relocated items 225 thru 235

Revised Figure 1-1.

PILOT'S OPERATING HANDBOOK LOG OF REVISIONS (cont)

Added revised Figure 6-9;

revised Figure 6-11

New page; added revised

PILOT'S OPERATING HANDBOOK LOG OF REVISIONS (cont)

PILOT'S OPERATING HANDBOOK LOG OF REVISIONS (cont)

Revised item no.

Added pg. (added renumbered

PILOT'S OPERATING HANDBOOK LOG OF REVISIONS (cont)

Added pg (added info from

Revised Figure R-9

PILOT'S OPERATING HANDBOOK LOG OF REVISIONS (cont)

Revised 2.9 (c).

I Changed page numbers.

Revised Air Start

New page; relocated para.

PILOT'S OPERATING HANDBOOK LOG OF REVISIONS (cont)

items 377 and 379.

Revised para. 1.13.

PILOT'S OPERATING HANDBOOK LOG OF REVISIONS (cont)

Relocated para. 4.47 from

PILOT'S OPERATING HANDBOOK LOG OF REVISIONS (cont)

Moved renumbered items to

Added item 389; removed

PILOT'S OPERATING HANDBOOK LOG OF REVISIONS (cont)

Revised para 4.37.

Revised fig. 6-5.

PILOT'S OPERATING HANDBOOK LOG OF REVISIONS (cont)

Revised fig. 6-33 thnJ 5-39.

Revised para. 8.19.

WEIGHT AND BALANCE

DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION Of

AIRPLANE HANDLING. SERVICING

PIPER AIRCRAFT CORPORATION

PIPER AIRCRAFT CORPORATION

Wing Area (sq. ft.)

ISSUED: MARCH 13. 1978

PIPER AIRCRAFT CORPORATION

Four Cylinder, Direct

ISSUED: MARCH 23, 1978